Honda-Accord 2004 EN US 44ee66b7a2 PDF

2004 Accord 4 Door Online Reference Owner's Manual
Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.
For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.
Contents
Owner's Identification Form

Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... i
A Few Words About Safety................................................................................................................ ii
Your Vehicle at a Glance................................................................................................................... 2
Driver and Passenger Safety ............................................................................................................ 5
Seat belts, SRS, and child protection.
Instruments and Controls................................................................................................................. 59
Indicators, gauges, dashboard, and steering column.
Features .............................................................................................................................................. 109
Heating and cooling, audio, steering wheel, and cruise control.
Before Driving.................................................................................................................................. 163
Fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading.
Driving .............................................................................................................................................. 177
Engine and transmission operation.
Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 199
Schedules, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage.
Taking Care of the Unexpected ...................................................................................................... 247
Flat tire, dead battery, overheating, fuses.
Technical Information..................................................................................................................... 271
Vehicle specifications, tires, fuels, and emissions controls.
Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ................................................................ 287
Warranty and contact information.
Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...................................................................................................... 291
How to order.
Index..................................................................................................................................................... I
Service Information Summary
Fluid capacities and tire pressures.
０３／０９／０３１１：２３：５８３１ＳＤＡ６１００００２
▼
Main Menu
Introduction
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2004 Honda Accord was a wise As you read this manual, you will
investment. It will give you years of driving pleasure. find information that is preceded by
a symbol. This
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new Honda is to information is intended to help you
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and avoid damage to your Honda, other
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so property, or the environment.
you can refer to it at any time.
Several warranties protect your new Honda. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manual

helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment.
When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your Honda
dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to
your Honda. Your Honda dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be
pleased to answer any questions and concerns.
California Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
i
０３／０９／０３１１：２４：１２３１ＳＤＡ６１００００３
▼
Main Menu
A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others, You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
is very important. And operating this including:
vehicle safely is an important Safety Labels − on the vehicle.
responsibility. Safety Messages − preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of
three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
To help you make informed These signal words mean:
decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
other information on labels and in HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
this manual. This information alerts
you to potential hazards that could You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
hurt you or others. HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
Of course, it is not practical or You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow

possible to warn you about all the instructions.
hazards associated with operating or
maintaining your vehicle. You must Safety Headings − such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
use your own good judgement. Safety Precautions.
Safety Section − such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
Instructions − how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information − please read it
carefully.
ii
０３／０９／０３１１：２４：３９３１ＳＤＡ６１００００５
▼
Main Menu
Your Vehicle at a Glance
AIRBAGS (P.9/22)
DASH LIGHTS (P.62)
GAUGES (P.68)
MIRROR CONTROLS
(P.98) AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.122)
HEATING/COOLING
POWER DOOR LOCK CONTROLS
SWITCH (P.110)
(P.83)
AUTOMATIC
POWER WINDOW TRANSMISSION
SWITCHES (P.182)
(P.99) MANUAL
TRANSMISSION
(P.180)
TRUNK RELEASE HANDLE/ HOOD RELEASE ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS

FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE HANDLE (P.107)
(P.89/165) (P.166)
2
０３／０９／０３１１：２４：４５３１ＳＤＡ６１００００６
▼
Main Menu
Your Vehicle at a Glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL WINDSHIELD PASSENGER AIRBAG

BRIGHTNESS WIPERS/WASHERS OFF INDICATOR
(P.76) (P.73) (P.31)
HEADLIGHTS/
TURN SIGNALS
(P.74)
HAZARD
REMOTE AUDIO WARNING LIGHTS
CONTROLS (P.76)
(P.151)
CRUISE CONTROLS
VOICE CONTROL (P.155)
SWITCHES＊
REAR WINDOW
MOONROOF DEFOGGER
SWITCH (P.77, 113, 116)
(P.102)
TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM STEERING WHEEL HORN

(P.191) ADJUSTMENT
(P.78)
＊ : Only on vehicles equipped with Navigation System. Refer to the Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
3
０３／０９／０３１１：２４：５４３１ＳＤＡ６１００００８
▼
Main Menu
Driver and Passenger Safety
This section gives you important Advice for Pregnant Women...... 17 All Children Must Be
information about how to protect Additional Safety Precautions .... 18 Restrained ................................ 34
yourself and your passengers. It Additional Information About Your All Children Should Sit in the
shows you how to use seat belts. It Seat Belts .................................. 19 Back Seat .................................. 35
explains how your airbags work, and Seat Belt System Components ... 19 The Passenger’s Front Airbag
it tells you how to properly restrain Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 19 Can Pose Serious Risks .......... 35
infants and children in your vehicle. Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners ........ 20 Infants ........................................... 35
Seat Belt Maintenance ................ 21 Small Children.............................. 35
Additional Information About Your Larger Children ........................... 35
Airbags ...................................... 22 If You Must Drive with Several
Airbag System Components ....... 22 Children .................................... 38
How Your Front Airbags Work ......... 23 If a Child Requires Close
Important Safety Precautions .......... 6 Advanced Airbags ....................... 25 Attention ................................... 38
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features........ 7 How Your Side Airbags Work.... 27 Additional Safety Precautions .... 38
Seat Belts ........................................ 8 How Your Side Curtain Airbags Protecting Infants and
Airbags ............................................ 9 Work.......................................... 28 Small Children.......................... 40
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 11 How the SRS Indicator Works ... 28 Protecting Infants ........................ 40
1. Close and Lock the Doors ...... 11 How the Side Airbag Off Protecting Small Children .......... 42
2. Adjust the Front Seats ............ 12 Indicator Works ....................... 29 Selecting Child Seats ....................... 43
3. Adjust the Seat-Backs ............. 13 How the Passenger Airbag Off Installing a Child Seat ..................... 45
4. Adjust the Head Restraints .... 14 Indicator Works ....................... 31 Installing a Child Seat Using
5. Fasten and Position the Lap/ Airbag Service .............................. 32 LATCH...................................... 46
Shoulder Seat Belts ............. 14 Additional Safety Precautions .... 33 Protecting Larger Children ............ 51
6. Adjust the Steering Wheel ..... 16 Protecting Children − General Additional Safety Precautions .... 55
7. Maintain a Proper Sitting Guidelines ................................. 34 Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 56
Position ................................. 16 Safety Labels .................................... 57
Driver and Passenger Safety 5

０３／０９／０３１１：２５：０７３１ＳＤＡ６１００００９
▼
Main Menu Table of Contents
Important Safety Precautions
You’ll find many safety can use the belt properly without a Control Your Speed
recommendations throughout this booster (see page 34 ). Excessive speed is a major factor in
section, and throughout this manual. crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
The recommendations on this page Be Aware of Airbag Hazards the higher the speed, the greater the
are the ones we consider to be the While airbags can save lives, they risk, but serious injuries can also
most important. can cause serious or fatal injuries to occur at lower speeds. Never drive
occupants who sit too close to them, faster than is safe for current
Always Wear Your Seat Belt or are not properly restrained. conditions, regardless of the
A seat belt is your best protection in Infants, young children, and short maximum speed posted.
all types of collisions. Airbags adults are at the greatest risk. Be
supplement seat belts, but airbags sure to follow all instructions and Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
are designed to inflate only in a warnings in this manual. Condition
moderate to severe frontal collision. Having a tire blowout or a
So even though your vehicle is Don’t Drink and Drive mechanical failure can be extremely
equipped with airbags, make sure Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even hazardous. To reduce the possibility
you and your passengers always one drink can reduce your ability to of such problems, check your tire
wear your seat belts, and wear them respond to changing conditions, and pressures and condition frequently,
properly (see page 14 ). your reaction time gets worse with and perform all regularly scheduled
every additional drink. So don’t drink maintenance (see page 201 ).
Restrain All Children and drive, and don’t let your friends
Children age 12 and under should drink and drive, either.
ride properly restrained in a back
seat. Infants and small children
should be restrained in a child seat.
Larger children should use a booster
and a lap/shoulder belt until they
6 Driver and Passenger Safety

０３／０９／０３１１：２５：１５３１ＳＤＡ６１０００１０
▼
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Your vehicle is equipped with many

(3) (10) (8) (9) (1) (4) features that work together to
(8) protect you and your passengers
(2) during a crash.
Some safety features do not require
(7) any action on your part. These
include a strong steel framework
that forms a safety cage around the
passenger compartment; front and
rear crush zones, a collapsible
steering column, and seat belt
tensioners that tighten the front seat
belts in the event of a crash.
(6) However, you and your passengers
(7) can’t take full advantage of these
(5) (11) safety features unless you remain
sitting in a proper position and
(1) Safety Cage always wear your seat belts properly.
(2) Crush Zones
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs In fact, some safety features can
(4) Head Restraints contribute to injuries if they are not
(5) Collapsible Steering Column used properly.
(6) Seat Belts
(7) Front Airbags
(8) Side Airbags＊ The following pages explain how you
(9) Side Curtain Airbags＊ can take an active role in protecting
(10) Door Locks yourself and your passengers.
＊ : If equipped (2) (11) Seat Belt Tensioners

０３／０９／０３１１：２５：２９３１ＳＤＡ６１０００１１
▼
Seat Belts When properly worn, seat belts: Of course, seat belts cannot
Your vehicle is equipped with seat completely protect you in every
belts in all seating positions. Keep you connected to the vehicle crash. But in most cases, seat belts
so you can take advantage of the can reduce your risk of serious
Your seat belt system also vehicle’s built-in safety features. injury.
includes a light on the
instrument panel to remind you and Help protect you in almost every
your passengers to fasten your seat type of crash, including frontal,
belts. side, and rear impacts and
rollovers.
Why Wear Seat Belts
Seat belts are the single most Help keep you from being thrown
effective safety device for adults and against the inside of the vehicle
larger children (Infants and smaller and against other occupants.
children must be properly restrained
in child seats). Keep you from being thrown out
of the vehicle.
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious Help keep you in a good position
injury or death in a crash, even should the airbags ever deploy. A
though your vehicle has airbags. good position reduces the risk of
injury from an inflating airbag, and
In addition, most states and all allows you to get the best
Canadian provinces require you to advantage from the airbag.
wear seat belts.

０３／０９／０３１１：２５：３９３１ＳＤＡ６１０００１２
▼
What You Should Do: Airbags

Always wear your seat belt, and
make sure you wear it properly.
Not wearing a seat belt properly

increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
if you have airbags.
Be sure you and your

passenger always wear seat
belts and wear them properly.
Your vehicle has a Supplemental Standard on V-6 and EX models.
Restraint System (SRS) with front Optional on the U.S. LX model
airbags to help protect the heads and Your vehicle also has side airbags to
chests of the driver and a front seat help protect the upper torso of the
passenger during a moderate to driver or a front seat passenger
severe frontal collision (see page during a moderate to severe side
23 for more information on how impact (see page 27 for more
your front airbags work). information on how your side airbags
work).
CONTINUED

０３／０９／０３１１：２５：４８３１ＳＤＡ６１０００１３
▼
Airbags can pose hazards. To do

their job, airbags must inflate with
tremendous force. So while
airbags help save lives they can
cause minor injuries, or more
serious or even fatal injuries if
occupants are not properly
restrained or sitting properly.
What you should do: Always wear

your seat belt properly, and sit
upright, and as far back from the
steering wheel as possible while
allowing full control of the vehicle. A
U.S. EX-L model, optional on U.S. EX The most important things you need front passenger should move their
model and Canadian EX-V6 model to know about your airbags are: seat as far back from the dashboard
Your vehicle also has side curtain as possible.
airbags to help protect the heads of Airbags do not replace seat belts.
the driver, front passenger, and They are designed to supplement
passengers in the outer rear seating the seat belts.
positions (see page 28 for more
information on how your side curtain Airbags offer no protection in rear
airbags work). impacts, or minor frontal or side
collisions.

０３／０９／０３１１：２６：００３１ＳＤＡ６１０００１４
▼
Protecting Adults and Teens
The rest of this section gives more Introduction Your vehicle has a door monitor light
detailed information about how you The following pages provide on the instrument panel to indicate
can maximize your safety. instructions on how to properly when a specific door is not tightly
protect the driver, adult passengers, closed.
Remember, however, that no safety and teenage children who are large
system can prevent all injuries or enough and mature enough to ride in Locking the doors reduces the
deaths that can occur in severe the front. See pages 34 − 55 for chance of someone being thrown out
crashes, even when seat belts are important guidelines on how to of the vehicle during a crash, and it
properly worn and the airbags deploy. properly protect infants, small helps prevent passengers from
children, and larger children who accidentally opening a door and
ride in your vehicle. falling out.
1.Close and Lock the Doors Locking the doors also helps prevent
After everyone has entered the car, an outsider from unexpectedly
be sure the doors are closed and opening a door when you come to a
locked. stop.
See page 83 for how to lock the

doors, and page 64 for how the
monitor light works.

０３／０９／０３１１：２６：１１３１ＳＤＡ６１０００１５
▼
2.Adjust the Front Seats The National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that drivers Sitting too close to a front
allow at least 10 inches (25 cm) airbag can result in serious
between the center of the steering injury or death if the front
wheel and the chest. airbags inflate.
If you cannot get far enough away Always sit as far back from the
from the steering wheel and still front airbags as possible.
reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some
type of adaptive equipment may help.
Once your seat is adjusted correctly,

Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the rock it back and forth to make sure
rear as possible while allowing you to the seat is locked in position.
maintain full control of the vehicle.
Have a front passenger adjust their See pages 92 and 93 for how to
seat as far to the rear as possible. adjust the front seats.
If you sit too close to the steering

wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front
airbag, or by striking the steering
wheel or dashboard.

０３／０９／０３１１：２６：２０３１ＳＤＡ６１０００１６
▼
3.Adjust the Seat-Backs Reclining a seat-back so that the

shoulder part of the belt no longer
rests against the occupant’s chest Reclining the seat-back too far
reduces the protective capability of can result in serious injury or
the belt. It also increases the chance death in a crash.
of sliding under the belt in a crash
and being seriously injured. The Adjust the seat-back to an
farther a seat-back is reclined, the upright position, and sit well
greater the risk of injury. back in the seat.
See pages 92 and 93 for how to

adjust the seat-backs.
Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a

comfortable, upright position,
leaving ample space between your
chest and the airbag cover in the
center of the steering wheel.
Passengers with adjustable seat-

backs should also adjust their seat-
back to a comfortable, upright
position.

０３／０９／０３１１：２６：３０３１ＳＤＡ６１０００１７
▼
4.Adjust the Head Restraints 5.Fasten and Position the Lap/

Shoulder Seat Belts
Improperly positioning head Insert the latch plate into the buckle,
restraints reduces their then tug on the belt to make sure the
effectiveness and you can be belt is securely latched. Also check
seriously injured in a crash. that the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious
Make sure head restraints are injuries in a crash.
in place and positioned properly
before driving.
Properly adjusted head restraints

will help protect occupants from
Adjust the driver’s head restraint so whiplash and other crash injuries.
the back of your head rests against
the center of the restraint. See page 94 for how to adjust the
head restraints.
Have passengers with adjustable
restraints adjust their restraints
properly as well. Taller persons
should adjust their restraint as high
as possible.

０３／０９／０３１１：２６：４１３１ＳＤＡ６１０００１８
▼
over the strongest bones in your RELEASE

upper body. BUTTONS
If the seat belt touches or crosses
your neck, or if it crosses your arm
instead of your shoulder, you need to
adjust the seat belt anchor height.
To adjust the height of a front seat
belt anchor, press the release button
and slide the anchor up or down as
needed (the anchor has four
positions).
Never place the shoulder portion of a

Position the lap part of the belt as lap/shoulder belt under your arm or If a seat belt does not seem to work
low as possible across your hips, behind your back. This could cause as it should, it may not protect the
then pull up on the shoulder part of very serious injuries in a crash. occupant in a crash.
the belt so the lap part fits snugly. No one should sit in a seat with an
This lets your strong pelvic bones inoperative seat belt. Using a seat
take the force of a crash and reduces belt that is not working properly can
the chance of internal injuries. Improperly positioning the seat result in serious injury or death.
belts can cause serious injury Have your Honda dealer check the
If necessary, pull up on the belt again or death in a crash. belt as soon as possible.
to remove any slack, then check that See page 19 for additional
the belt rests across the center of Make sure all seat belts are information about your seat belts
your chest and over your shoulder. properly positioned before and how to take care of them.
This spreads the forces of a crash driving. CONTINUED

０３／０９／０３１１：２６：５０３１ＳＤＡ６１０００１９
▼
6.Adjust the Steering Wheel 7.Maintain a Proper Sitting Sitting improperly can increase the
Position chance of injury during a crash. For
After all occupants have adjusted example, if an occupant slouches,
their seats and put on seat belts, it is lies down, turns sideways, sits
very important that they continue to forward, leans forward or sideways,
sit upright, well back in their seats, or puts one or both feet up, the
with their feet on the floor, until the chance of injury during a crash is
vehicle is parked and the engine is greatly increased.
off.
Adjust the steering wheel, if needed,

so that the wheel points toward your
chest, not toward your face. This
provides optimal protection from the
front airbag.
See page 78 for how to adjust the

steering wheel.

０３／０９／０３１１：２７：００３１ＳＤＡ６１０００２０
▼
In addition, an occupant who is out of Advice for Pregnant Women When driving, remember to sit
position in the front seat can be upright and adjust the seat as far
seriously or fatally injured in a crash back as possible while allowing full
by striking interior parts of the control of the vehicle. When riding
vehicle or being struck by an as a front passenger, adjust the seat
inflating front airbag. Being struck as far back as possible.
by an inflating side airbag can
possibly result in serious injuries. This will reduce the risk of injuries
to both you and your unborn child
that can be caused by a crash or an
inflating front airbag.
Sitting improperly or out of
position can result in serious Each time you have a check-up, ask
injury or death in a crash. your doctor if it’s okay for you to
If you are pregnant, the best way to drive.
Always sit upright, well back in protect yourself and your unborn
the seat, with your feet on the child when driving or riding in a
floor. vehicle is to always wear a seat belt,
and keep the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across the hips.

０３／０９／０３１１：２７：１０３１ＳＤＡ６１０００２１
▼
Additional Safety Precautions Keep your hands and arms away Do not modify the front seats.
from the airbag covers. If your This could make the driver’s seat
Two people should never use the hands or arms are close to an position sensor or the front
same seat belt. If they do, they airbag cover, they could be injured passenger’s seat weight sensors
could be very seriously injured in a if the front airbag inflates. ineffective.
crash.
Do not attach or place objects on Do not place any items under the
Do not put any accessories on seat the front airbag covers. Objects on front seats. This could cause
belts. Devices intended to improve the covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’ problems with the driver’s seat
occupant comfort or reposition the could interfere with the proper position sensor or the front
shoulder part of a seat belt can operation of the airbags or be passenger’s seat weight sensors.
reduce the protective capability of propelled inside the vehicle and
the seat belt and increase the hurt someone if the airbags inflate. Do not place the right rear floor
chance of serious injury in a crash. mat under the front passenger’s
On models with side airbags, do seat. This could make the front
Do not place hard or sharp objects not attach hard objects on or near passenger’s weight sensors
between yourself and a front a front door. If a side airbag or a ineffective. Make sure the right
airbag. Carrying hard or sharp side curtain airbag inflates, a cup rear floor mat is hooked over the
objects on your lap, or driving with holder or other hard object floor mat anchor (see page 235 ).
a pipe or other sharp objects in attached on or near the door could
your mouth, can result in injuries be propelled inside the vehicle and
if your front airbag inflates. hurt someone.

０３／０９／０３１１：２７：２３３１ＳＤＡ６１０００２２
▼
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt System Components Lap/Shoulder Belt All seat belts have an emergency
Your seat belt system includes lap/ The lap and shoulder belt goes over locking retractor. In normal driving,
shoulder belts in all five seating your shoulder, across your chest, the retractor lets you move freely in
positions. The front seat belts are and across your hips. your seat while it keeps some
also equipped with automatic seat tension on the belt. During a collision
belt tensioners. To fasten the belt, insert the latch or sudden stop, the retractor
plate into the buckle, then tug on the automatically locks the belt to help
The seat belt system belt to make sure the buckle is restrain your body.
includes a light on the latched (see page 15 for how to
instrument panel to remind you and properly position the belt). The seat belts in all positions except
your passengers to fasten your seat the driver’s have an additional
belts. To unlock the belt, push the red locking mechanism that must be
PRESS button on the buckle. Guide activated to secure a child seat (see
If you turn the ignition switch to ON the belt across your body so that it page 48 ).
(II) without fastening your seat belt, retracts completely. After exiting the
a beeper will sound and the light will vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the
blink. The beeper will stop after way and will not get closed in the
several seconds. door.
If you do not fasten your seat belt

before the beeper stops, the
indicator light will stop blinking but
remain lit. If you continue driving
without fastening your seat belt, the
indicator will come on and the
beeper will sound at regular intervals. CONTINUED

０３／０９／０３１１：２７：３３３１ＳＤＡ６１０００２３
▼
If the shoulder part of the belt is Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners However, the tensioners can be
pulled all the way out, the locking activated during a collision in which
mechanism will activate. The belt the front airbags do not deploy. In
will retract, but it will not allow the this case, the airbags would not be
passenger to move freely. needed, but the additional restraint
could be helpful.
To deactivate the locking
mechanism, unlatch the buckle, and When the tensioners are activated,
let the seat belt fully retract. To the seat belts will remain tight until
refasten the belt, pull it out only as they are unbuckled in the normal
far as needed. manner.
For added protection, the front seat

belts are equipped with automatic
seat belt tensioners. When activated,
the tensioners immediately tighten
the belts to help hold the driver and
a front passenger in place.
The tensioners are designed to

activate primarily in frontal collisions,
and they should activate in any
collision severe enough to cause
front-airbag inflation.

０３／０９／０３１１：２７：４３３１ＳＤＡ６１０００２４
▼
Seat Belt Maintenance For information on how to clean your

For safety, you should check the seat belts, see page 235 .
condition of your seat belts regularly. Not checking or maintaining
seat belts can result in serious
Pull each belt out fully and look for injury or death if the seat belts
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check do not work properly when
that the latches work smoothly and needed.
the belts retract easily. Any belt that
is not in good condition or not Check your seat belts regularly
working properly will not provide and have any problem
good protection and should be corrected as soon as possible.
replaced as soon as possible.
Honda provides a lifetime warranty If a seat belt is worn during a crash,

on seat belts for U.S. models. See it must be replaced by the dealer. A
your Honda Warranty Information belt that has been worn during a
booklet for details. crash may not provide the same level
of protection in a subsequent crash.
The dealer should also inspect the

anchors for damage and replace
them if needed. If the automatic seat
belt tensioners activate during a
crash, they must be replaced.

０３／０９／０３１１：２７：５２３１ＳＤＡ６１０００２５
▼
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Airbag System Components Your airbag system includes:

Two SRS (Supplemental Restraint
(8) (6) (2) System) front airbags. The driver’s
airbag is stored in the center of
(7) the steering wheel; the front
passenger’s airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
(6) (5) AIRBAG.’’
On models equipped with two side

airbags, one for the driver and one
for a front passenger. The airbags
(1) are stored in the outer edges of
the seat-backs. Both are marked
‘‘SIDE AIRBAG’’ (see page 27 ).
(3) (10)
(4) On models equipped with two side
(1) Driver’s Airbag curtain airbags, one for each side
(2) Front passenger’s Airbag
(3) CONTROL UNIT of the vehicle. The airbags are
(4) Seat Belt Tensioners
(5) (9) stored in the front, center, and
(5) Side Airbags rear pillars. The front and center
(6) Front Impact Sensors pillars on both sides are marked
(7) OPDS Sensor/Seat-back
(8) Passenger’s Airbag Off Indicator ‘‘SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see
(9) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors page 28 ).
(10) Side Impact Sensors (10) (11) (4)
(11) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor

０３／０９／０３１１：２８：０６３１ＳＤＡ６１０００２６
▼
Automatic front seat belt Front passenger’s weight sensors How Your Front Airbags Work
tensioners (see page 20 ). that monitor the weight on the
seat. These prevent the passenger’s
Sensors that can detect a airbag from inflating if the weight
moderate to severe frontal impact is less than about 65 lbs (30 kg)
or side impact in models equipped (see page 26 ).
with side airbags.
An indicator light on the
A sophisticated electronic system instrument panel that alerts you to
that continually monitors and a possible problem with your
records information about the airbags (see page 63 ).
sensors, the control unit, the
airbag activators, and driver and An indicator on the dashboard that
passenger seat belt use when the alerts you that the passenger’s
ignition is ON (II). front airbag has been turned off If you ever have a moderate to
(see page 31 ). severe frontal collision, sensors will
A driver’s seat position sensor that detect the vehicle’s rapid
monitors the seat position. If the Emergency backup power in case deceleration. If the rate of
seat is too far forward, the airbag your vehicle’s electrical system is deceleration is high enough, the
will inflate with less force (see disconnected in a crash. control unit will instantly inflate the
page 26 ). driver’s and front passenger’s front
airbags, at the time and with the
force needed.
CONTINUED

０３／０９／０３１１：２８：１６３１ＳＤＡ６１０００２７
▼
During a frontal crash, your seat belt After inflating, the front airbags
restrains your lower body and torso, immediately deflate, so they won’t
and the airbag helps protect your interfere with the driver’s visibility,
head and chest. or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
Although both airbags normally
inflate within split second of each The total time for inflation and
other, it is possible for only one deflation is one-tenth of a second, so
airbag to deploy. fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until
This can happen if the severity of a they see them lying in their laps.
collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
such cases, the seat belt will provide After a crash, you may see what
sufficient protection, and the looks like smoke. This is actually
supplemental protection offered by powder from the airbag’s surface.
the airbag would be minimal. Although the powder is not harmful,
people with respiratory problems
Only the driver’s airbag can deploy if may experience some temporary
there is no passenger in the front discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
seat, or if the advanced airbag the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
system has turned the passenger’s so.
airbag off (see page 31 ).

０３／０９／０３１１：２８：２８３１ＳＤＡ６１０００２８
▼
Dual-Stage Airbags Dual-Threshold Airbags Advanced Airbags

Your front airbags are dual-stage Your front airbags are also dual- Your front airbags are also advanced
airbags. This means they have two threshold airbags. Airbags with this airbags. The main purpose of this
inflation stages that can be ignited feature have two deployment feature is to prevent airbag-caused
sequentially or simultaneously, thresholds that depend on whether injuries to short drivers and children
depending on crash severity. or not the occupant is wearing a seat who ride in front.
belt.
In a more severe crash, both stages For the advanced airbag to work
will ignite simultaneously to provide If the occupant’s belt is not latched, properly, occupants must sit upright
the quickest and greatest protection. the airbag will deploy at the same and wear their seat belts properly. If
threshold as a conventional airbag, a child seat is installed in the front, it
In a less severe crash, one stage will because the occupant would need must be properly secured.
ignite first, then the second stage extra protection.
will ignite a split second later. This In addition, do not spill any liquids,
provides longer airbag inflation time It the occupant’s belt is latched, the cover the sensors, or put any cargo
with a little less force. airbag will inflate at a slightly higher or metal objects under the front
threshold, when the airbag would be seats. Ask rear seat passengers to
needed to supplement the protection not put their feet under the front
provided by the seat belt. seats. Any of these actions could
damage the sensors or prevent them
from working properly.
CONTINUED

０３／０９／０３１１：２８：３６３１ＳＤＡ６１０００２９
▼
normal manner during a crash When the airbag is turned off, a light
regardless of the driver’s seating in the center of the dashboard will
position. come on indicating ‘‘Passenger
Airbag Off’’ (see page 31 ).
If there is no passenger in the front

seat, the airbag will be off but the
DRIVER’S indicator light will not come on.
SEAT
POSITION
SENSOR
PASSENGER’S
SEAT WEIGHT
The driver’s advanced front airbag SENSOR
system includes a seat position
sensor under the seat. If the seat is
positioned too far forward, the The passenger’s advanced front
airbag will inflate sequentially, airbag system has weight sensors
regardless of the severity of the under the seat. If sensors detect a
impact. total weight on the seat of about 65
lbs (30 kg) or less, the system will
If there is a problem with the seat automatically turn the passenger’s
position sensor, the SRS indicator in front airbag off.
the instrument will come on in the
instrument panel. In this case, the
driver’s airbag will inflate in the

０３／０９／０３１１：２８：５０３１ＳＤＡ６１０００３０
▼
To ensure that the passenger’s How Your Side Airbags Work side airbag will deploy even if there
advanced front airbag system will Only on models equipped with side is no passenger.
work properly, do not do anything airbags
that would increase or decrease the To get the best protection from the
weight on the front passenger’s seat. side airbags, front seat occupants
This includes: should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
A rear passenger pushing or The passenger’s side airbag has a
pulling on the back of the cutoff system designed to turn off
passenger’s seat. the passenger’s side airbag if a child’s
head is in the airbag’s deployment
Moving the front seat forcibly path (see page 31 ).
back against cargo on the seat or
floor behind it. If the side airbag off indicator light
comes on, have the passenger sit
Hanging heavy items on the front upright. Once the passenger is out of
passenger seat, or placing heavy If you ever have a moderate to the deployment path of the side
items in the seat-back pocket. severe side impact, the sensors will airbag, the system will turn the
detect rapid deceleration and signal airbag back on and the light will go
Make sure the rear floor mat is the control unit to instantly inflate out.
hooked to the floor mat anchor. If either the driver’s or the passenger’s
not, the floor mat will prevent the side airbag. A front seat passenger should not
seat operation and the sensors use a cushion or other object as a
may not work properly. Only one airbag will deploy during a backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
side impact. If the impact is on the system from working properly.
passenger’s side, the passenger’s

０３／０９／０３１１：２９：０１３１ＳＤＡ６１０００３１
▼
How Your Side Curtain Airbags In a moderate to severe side impact, How the SRS Indicator Light
Work sensors will detect rapid deceleration Works
(On models equipped) and signal the control unit to The SRS indicator light
instantly inflate the side curtain alerts you to a potential
airbag on the driver’s or the problem with your front airbags, side
passenger’s side of the vehicle. If the airbags, side curtain airbags, front
impact is on the passenger’s side, the seat belt tensioners, or the driver’s
passenger’s side curtain airbag will seat position sensor and the front
inflate even if there are no occupants passenger’s weight sensors (see
on that side of the vehicle. pages 26 and 31 ).
To get the best protection from the On models with side airbags, this
side curtain airbags, occupants indicator will also alert you to a
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG should wear their seat belts and sit potential problem with your side
upright and well back in their seats. airbags, the passenger’s side airbag
automatic cutoff system (see page
Your vehicle is equipped with side 29 ), or the side curtain airbags.
curtain airbags. These airbags are
stored in the front, center, and rear When you turn the ignition ON (II),
pillars on both sides. The front and this indicator will light briefly then
rear pillars on both sides are marked go out. This tells you that the system
‘‘SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG.’’ is working properly.

０３／０９／０３１１：２９：１２３１ＳＤＡ６１０００３２
▼
If the light comes on at any other If you see any of these indications, How the Side Airbag Off
time, or does not come on at all, you the airbags and the seat belt Indicator Light Works
should have the system checked by tensioners may not work properly (On models equipped)
your dealer. For example: when you need them. This light alerts you that
the passenger’s side airbag
If the SRS indicator light does not has been automatically shut off. It
come on after you turn the ignition does not mean there is a problem
ON (II). Ignoring the SRS indicator light with your side airbags.
can result in serious injury or
If the light stays on after the death if the airbag systems or To reduce the risk of injury from an
engine starts. tensioners do not work properly. inflating side airbag, your vehicle has
an automatic cutoff system for the
If the light comes on or flashes on Have your car checked by a passenger’s side airbag.
and off while you drive. dealer as soon as possible if
the SRS light alerts you to a
possible problem.
CONTINUED

０３／０９／０３１１：２９：１８３１ＳＤＡ６１０００３３
▼
Although Honda does not encourage If a short adult leans sideways, or a When you turn the ignition switch to
children to ride in front, this system larger adult slouches and leans ON (II), the indicator should light
is designed to shut off the side sideways into the side airbag briefly and go out (see page 63 ). If it
airbag if a child leans sideways and deployment path, the system may doesn’t light, stays on, or comes on
the child’s head is in the side airbag also shut off the side airbag. while driving without a passenger in
deployment path. the front seat, have the system
checked.

０３／０９／０３１１：２９：２９３１ＳＤＡ６１０００３４
▼
How the Passenger Airbag Off To reduce the chance of airbag- If this happens, have the passenger
Indicator Light Works caused injuries, the system shuts off ride properly restrained in a back
the passenger’s front airbag when seat. If the passenger must ride in
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR the total weight on the front front, move the seat as far to the
passenger’s seat is about 65 lbs rear as possible, have the passenger
(30 kg) or less. sit upright and wear the seat belt
properly.
If no one is riding in the front
passenger’s seat, the airbag will be This indicator may come on and off
automatically shut off, but the repeatedly if objects are placed on
indicator light will not come on. the front passenger’s seat, or if the
interior temperature of the vehicle
However, if the light comes on with changes suddenly when a door is
no passenger in the front, or with an opened.
adult in the seat, there may be a
This light alerts you that the problem with the advanced airbag See page 26 for more information
passenger’s front airbag has been system. Have the vehicle checked by about the passenger’s advanced
shut off. It does not mean there is a the dealer as soon as possible. front airbag.
problem with the airbag.
The Passenger Airbag Off indicator
may also come on and off repeatedly
if total weight on the seat is near the
airbag cutoff threshold (65 lbs or 30
kg).

０３／０９／０３１１：２９：３５３１ＳＤＡ６１０００３５
▼
Airbag Service An airbag ever inflates. Any airbag If your vehicle has a moderate to
Your airbag systems are virtually that has deployed must be severe impact. Even if your
maintenance-free, and there are no replaced along with the control airbags do not inflate, your dealer
parts you can safely service. unit and other related parts. If a should inspect the driver’s seat
However, you must have your front airbag inflates, the seat belt position sensor and the front
vehicle serviced if: tensioners must also be replaced. passenger’s weight sensors to
Do not try to remove or replace make sure they are operating
any airbag by yourself. This must properly.
be done by a Honda dealer or a
knowledgeable body shop.
The SRS indicator light alerts you

to a problem. Take your vehicle to
an authorized Honda dealer as
soon as possible. If you ignore this
indication, your airbags may not
operate properly.

０３／０９／０３１１：２９：４５３１ＳＤＡ６１０００３６
▼
Additional Safety Precautions Do not place the right rear floor Do not remove or modify a front
Do not attempt to deactivate your mat under the front passenger’s seat without consulting a Honda
airbags. Together, airbags and seat. This could make the front dealer. This could make the
seat belts provide the best passenger’s weight sensors driver’s seat position sensor or the
protection. ineffective. Make sure the right front passenger’s weight sensors
rear floor mat is hooked over the ineffective. If it is necessary to
Do not tamper with airbag floor mat anchor (see page 235 ). remove or modify a front seat to
components or wiring for any accommodate a person with
reason. Tampering could cause Do not cover or replace front seat- disabilities, first contact American
the airbags to deploy, possibly back covers without consulting a Honda at 800-999-1009.
causing very serious injury. Honda dealer. Improperly
replacing or covering front seat-
Do not expose the front seat-backs back covers can prevent your side
to liquid. If water or another liquid airbags from inflating during a
soaks into a seat-back, it can side impact.
prevent the side airbag cutoff
system from working properly. Do not do anything that would
increase or decrease weight on the
Do not place any items under the front passenger’s seat. Pushing or
front seats. This could make the pulling on the back of the seat,
driver’s seat position sensor and placing heavy items in the back
the front passenger’s weight seat pocket, pushing cargo against
sensors ineffective. the seat, or hanging heavy items
on the seat back can interfere with
the proper operation of the
passenger’s advanced front airbag.

０３／０９／０３１１：２９：５４３１ＳＤＡ６１０００３７
▼
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
All Children Must Be Restrained

Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because Children who are unrestrained
they are either unrestrained or not or improperly restrained can be
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle seriously injured or killed in a
accidents are the number one cause crash.
of death of children ages 12 and
under. Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
To reduce the number of child restrained in a child seat. A
deaths and injuries, every state and larger child should be properly
Canadian providence requires that restrained with a seat belt and
infants and children be properly use a booster if necessary.
Children depend on adults to protect restrained when they ride in a
them. However, despite their best vehicle.
intentions many adults do not know
how to properly protect child
passengers.
If you have children, or if you ever

need to drive with a child in your
vehicle, be sure to read this section.
It begins with important general
guidelines, then presents special
information for infants, small
children, and larger children.

０３／０９／０３１１：３０：０５３１ＳＤＡ６１０００３８
▼
Infants and small children must be The Passenger’s Front Airbag Even if the passenger’s front airbag
restrained in an approved child seat Can Pose Serious Risks is turned off, we strongly
that is properly secured to the Front airbags have been designed to recommend that children age 12 and
vehicle (see pages 40 − 50 ). help protect adults in a moderate to under ride properly restrained in a
Larger children must be restrained severe frontal collision. To do this back seat where they will be safer.
with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on the passenger’s front airbag is quite
a booster until the seat belt fits them large and it can inflate with enough
properly (see pages 51 − 55 ). force to cause very serious injuries.
All Children Should Sit in the To help prevent airbag-caused

Back Seat injuries to children, this vehicle has
According to accident statistics, an advanced airbag system.
children of all ages and sizes are
safer when they are restrained in the With this system, the front
back seat. The National Highway passenger’s airbag is turned off if
Traffic Safety Administration and sensors detect a total weight of less
Transport Canada recommend that than about 65 lbs (30 kg) on the seat
all children age 12 and under be (see pages 25 − 26 for additional
properly restrained in the back seat. information about how the front
Children who ride in back are less passenger’s advanced airbag works).
likely to be injured by striking
interior vehicle parts during a
collision or hard braking. Also,
children cannot be injured by an
inflating airbag when they ride in the
back. CONTINUED

０３／０９／０３１１：３０：１４３１ＳＤＡ６１０００３９
▼
U.S. Models
To remind you of the passenger’s
front airbag hazards, and that
children must be properly restrained
in the back seat, your vehicle has
warning labels on the dashboard and
on the driver’s and front passenger’s
visors. Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.

０３／０９／０３１１：３０：２３３１ＳＤＡ６１０００４０
▼
Canadian Models
To remind you of the front airbag
hazards, your vehicle has warning
labels on the driver’s and front
passenger’s visors. Please read and
follow the instructions on these
labels.

０３／０９／０３１１：３０：３７３１ＳＤＡ６１０００４１
▼
If You Must Drive with Several If a Child Requires Close Additional Safety Precautions
Children Attention Never hold an infant or child on
Your vehicle has a back seat where Many parents say they prefer to put your lap. If you are not wearing a
children can be properly restrained. an infant or small child in the front seat belt in crash, you could be
If you ever have to carry a group of passenger seat so they can watch the thrown forward and crush the
children, and a child must ride in child, or because the child requires child against the dashboard or a
front: attention. seat-back. If you are wearing a
seat belt the child can be torn
Place the largest child in the front Placing a child in the front seat from your arms and be seriously
seat, provided the child is large exposes the child to hazards in a hurt or killed.
enough to wear the lap/shoulder frontal collision, and paying close
belt properly (see page 51 ). attention to a child distracts the Never put a seat belt over yourself
driver from the important tasks of and a child. During a crash, the
Move the vehicle seat as far to the driving, placing both of you at risk. belt could press deep into the child
rear as possible. and cause serious or fatal injuries.
If a child requires physical attention
Have the child sit upright and well or frequent visual contact, we
back in the seat (see page 16 ). strongly recommend that another
adult ride with the child in the back
Make sure the seat belt is properly seat. The back seat is far safer for a
positioned and secured (see page child than the front.
14 ).

０３／０９／０３１１：３０：４４３１ＳＤＡ６１０００４２
▼
Never let two children use the Do not leave children alone in a Lock all doors and the trunk when
same seat belt. If they do, they vehicle. Leaving children without your vehicle is not in use. Children
could be very seriously injured in a adult supervision is illegal in most who play in vehicles can
crash. states and Canadian provinces, accidentally get trapped inside.
and can be very hazardous. For Teach your children not to play in
Use childproof door locks to example, infants and small or around vehicles.
prevent children from opening the children left in a vehicle on a hot
doors. This can prevent children day can die from heatstroke. A Keep vehicle keys and remote
from accidentally falling out. child left alone with the key in the transmitters out of the reach of
ignition can accidentally set the children. Even very young
vehicle in motion, possibly injuring children learn how to unlock
themselves or others. vehicle doors, turn on the ignition,
and open the trunk, which can
lead to accidental injury or death.

０３／０９／０３１１：３０：５６３１ＳＤＡ６１０００４３
▼
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Protecting Infants Child Seat Placement

A rear-facing child seat should
Placing a rear-facing child seat always be installed in a back seat, not
in the front seat can result in in the front. Even with advanced
serious injury or death during a airbags, which can automatically
collision. turn the passenger’s front airbag off
(see page 25 ), a back seat is the
Always place a rear-facing child safest place for an infant.
seat in the back seat, not the
front. When properly installed, a rear-
facing child seat may prevent the
driver or a front passenger from
Two types of seats may be used: a moving the seat as far back as
seat designed exclusively for infants, recommended, or from locking the
Child Seat Type or a convertible seat used in the rear- seat-back in the desired position.
Only a rear-facing child seat provides facing, reclining mode.
proper support for a baby’s head, In either of these situations, we
neck, and back. Do not put a rear-facing child seat in strongly recommend that you install
a forward-facing position. If placed the child seat in a different back
An infant must be properly facing forward, an infant could be seating position or get a smaller rear-
restrained in a rear-facing, reclining very seriously injured during a facing child seat.
child seat until the child reaches the frontal collision.
seat maker’s weight or height limit
for the seat, and the child is at least
one year old.

０３／０９／０３１１：３１：０２３１ＳＤＡ６１０００４４
▼
When properly installed, a rear- Or, it could push against the front- In any of these situations, we
facing child seat may prevent the passenger’s seat-back, interfering strongly recommend that you install
driver or a front passenger from with the proper operation of the the child seat in a different back
moving the seat as far back as passenger’s advanced front airbag seating position or get a smaller rear-
recommended, or from locking the (see page 25 − 26 ). facing child seat.
seat-back in the desired position.

０３／０９／０３１１：３１：１２３１ＳＤＡ６１０００４５
▼
Protecting Small Children We also recommend that a small Child Seat Placement
child stay in the child seat as long as We strongly recommend placing a
possible, until the child reaches the forward-facing child seat in a back
weight or height limit for the seat. seat, not the front. Even with
advanced airbags, which can
automatically turn the passenger’s
front airbag off (see page 31 ), a
Placing a forward-facing child back seat is the safest place for a
seat in the front seat can result small child.
in serious injury or death if the
front airbag inflates. If it is necessary to put a forward-
facing child seat in the front, move
If you must place a forward- the vehicle seat as far to the rear as
facing child seat in front, move possible, be sure the child seat is
Child Seat Type the vehicle seat as far back as firmly secured to the vehicle, and the
A child who is at least one year old, possible, and properly restrain child is properly strapped in the seat.
and who fits within the child seat the child.
maker’s weight and height limits,
should be restrained in a forward-
facing, upright child seat.
Of the different seats available, we

recommend those that have a five-
point harness system as shown.

０３／０９／０３１１：３１：１８３１ＳＤＡ６１０００４６
▼
Selecting a Child Seat
When buying a child seat, you need Since LATCH-compatible child seats In seating positions and vehicles not
to choose between a conventional are easier to install and reduce the equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-
child seat, or one designed for use possibility of improper installation, compatible child seat can be installed
with the Lower Anchors and Tethers we recommend selecting this style. using a seat belt.
for Children (LATCH) system.
We also recommend selecting a
Conventional child seats must be LATCH-compatible seat with a rigid,
secured to a vehicle with a seat belt, rather than a flexible, anchor.
whereas LATCH-compatible seats
are secured by attaching the seat to
hardware built into the two outer
seating positions in the back seat.
CONTINUED

０３／０９／０３１１：３１：２６３１ＳＤＡ６１０００４７
▼
Selecting a Child Seat
Whatever type of seat you choose, to Before purchasing a conventional

provide proper protection, a child child seat, or using a previously
seat should meet three purchased one, we recommend
requirements: that you test the seat in the
specific vehicle seating position, or
1. The child seat should meet U.S. or positions, where the seat will be
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety used.
Standard 213. Look for FMVSS
213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.
2. The child seat should be of the

proper type and size to fit the child.
Rear-facing for infants, forward-
facing for small children.
3. The child seat should fit the

vehicle seating position (or
positions) where it will be used.

０３／０９／０３１１：３１：３４３１ＳＤＡ６１０００４８
▼
Installing a Child Seat
After selecting a proper child seat, 2. Make sure the child seat is firmly 3. Secure the child in the child seat.
and a good place to install the seat, secured. After installing a child Make sure the child is properly
there are three main steps in seat, push and pull the seat strapped in the child seat
installing the seat: forward and from side to side to according to the child seat maker’s
verify that it is secure. instructions. A child who is not
1. Properly secure the child seat to properly secured in a child seat
the vehicle. All child seats must be A child seat secured with a seat belt can be seriously injured in a crash.
secured to the vehicle with the lap should be installed as firmly as
part of a lap/shoulder belt or with possible. However, it does not need The following pages provide
the LATCH (Lower Anchors and to be ‘‘rock solid’’. Some side-to-side guidelines on how to properly install
Tethers for Children) system. A movement can be expected and a child seat. A forward-facing child
child whose seat is not properly should not reduce the child seat’s seat is used in all examples, but the
secured to the vehicle can be effectiveness. instructions are the same for rear-
endangered in a crash. facing child seat.
If the child seat is not secure, try
installing it in a different seating
position, or use a different style of
child seat that can be firmly secured.

０３／０９／０３１１：３１：４４３１ＳＤＡ６１０００４９
▼
Installing a Child Seat Using Small marks are positioned to

LATCH indicate the locations of each anchor
point.
To install a LATCH-compatible child

seat:
1. Move the seat belt buckle or

tongue away from the lower
anchors.
2. Make sure there are no objects

near the anchors that could
LOWER ANCHOR MARKS prevent a secure connection Rigid type
between the child seat and
Your vehicle is equipped with anchors. 3. Place the child seat on the vehicle
LATCH (Lower Anchors and seat, and attach the seat to the
Tethers for Children) at the outer lower anchors according to the
rear seats. The lower anchors are child seat maker’s instructions.
located between the seat-back and
seat bottom, and are to be used only Some LATCH-compatible seats
with a child seat designed for use have a rigid-type connection as
with LATCH. shown above.

０３／０９／０３１１：３１：５４３１ＳＤＡ６１０００５０
▼
7. Push and pull the child seat

forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
TETHER STRAP HOOK
Flexible type TETHER ANCHORAGE POINT
Other LATCH-compatible seats 5. Route the tether strap through the

have a flexible-type connection as legs of the head restraint, then
shown above. hook the strap to the anchorage
point as shown.
4. Whatever type you have, follow
the child seat maker’s instructions 6. Make sure the strap is not twisted,
for adjusting or tightening the fit. then tighten the strap according to
the child seat maker’s instruction.

０３／０９／０３１１：３２：０４３１ＳＤＡ６１０００５１
▼
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/

Shoulder Belt
When not using the LATCH system,
all child seats must be secured to the
vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt.
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in

the back seat and the front
passenger seat have a locking
mechanism that must be activated to
secure a child seat.
1. With the child seat in the desired 2. To activate the lockable retractor,
seating position, route the belt slowly pull the shoulder part of the
through the child seat according belt all the way out until it stops,
to the seat maker’s instructions, then let the belt feed back into the
then insert the latch plate into the retractor.
buckle.
3. After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked, and
you will need to repeat these steps.

０３／０９／０３１１：３２：１１３１ＳＤＡ６１０００５２
▼
To deactivate the locking

mechanism and remove a child seat,
unlatch the buckle, unroute the seat
belt, and let the belt fully retract.
4. After confirming that the belt is 5. Push and pull the child seat
locked, then grab the shoulder forward and from side to side to
part of the belt near the buckle verify that it is firmly secured. If
and pull up to remove any slack the child seat is not secure,
from the lap part of the belt. unlatch the belt, allow it to retract
Remember, if the lap part of the fully, then repeat these steps.
belt is not tight, the child seat will
not be secure.
To remove slack, it may help to

put weight on the child seat, or
push on the back of the seat while
pulling up on the belt.

０３／０９／０３１１：３２：２６３１ＳＤＡ６１０００５３
▼
Installing a Child Seat with a Using an Outer Anchorage Point Using the Center Anchorage
Tether Point
TETHER STRAP HOOK
TETHER STRAP HOOK
TETHER ANCHORAGE POINT

TETHER ANCHORAGE POINTS
TETHER ANCHORAGE POINT
1. After securing the child seat in the
A child seat with a tether can be desired position (see page 46 ), lift 1. After properly securing the child
installed in any seating position in the head restraint, then route the seat (see page 48 ), route the
the back seat, using one of the tether strap over the top of the tether strap over the top of the
anchorage points shown above. seat-back and through the head seat-back.
restraint legs.
Since a tether can provide additional 2. Lift the anchor point lid, then 2. Attach the tether strap hook to the
security, we recommend using a attach the tether strap hook to the anchor, making sure the strap is
tether whenever one is required or anchor, making sure the strap is not twisted, then tighten the strap
available. not twisted. according to the seat-maker’s
3. Tighten the strap according to the instructions.
seat maker’s instructions.

０３／０９／０３１１：３２：３５３１ＳＤＡ６１０００５４
▼
Protecting Larger Children
When a child reaches the Checking Seat Belt Fit

recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the Allowing a child age 12 or under
child should sit in a back seat on a to sit in front can result in injury
booster and wear a lap/shoulder belt. or death if the passenger’s front
airbag inflates.
The following pages give
instructions on how to check proper If a larger child must ride in front,
seat belt fit, what kind of booster move the vehicle seat as far
seat to use if one is needed, and back as possible, use a booster
important precautions for a child seat if needed, have the child
who must sit in front. sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly.
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt

properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt, then ask
yourself:
CONTINUED

０３／０９／０３１１：３２：４８３１ＳＤＡ６１０００５５
▼
1. Does the child sit all the way back 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as Using a Booster Seat
against the seat? possible, touching the child’s
thighs?
2. Do the child’s knees bend
comfortably over the edge of the 5. Will the child be able to stay
seat? seated like this for the whole trip?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross If you answer yes to all these
between the child’s neck and arm? questions, the child is ready to wear
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If
you answer no to any question, the
child needs to ride on a booster seat.
A child who has outgrown a forward-

facing child seat should ride in a
back seat and use a booster seat
until the lap/shoulder belt fits them
properly without the booster.
Some states also require children to

use a booster until they reach a
given age or weight (e.g., 6 years or
60 lbs). Be sure to check current
laws in the state or states where you
intend to drive.

０３／０９／０３１１：３２：５９３１ＳＤＡ６１０００５６
▼
Booster seats can be high-back or When Can a Larger Child Sit in Front If the passenger’s front airbag
low-back. Whichever style you select, The National Highway Traffic Safety inflates in a moderate to severe
make sure the booster meets federal Administration and Transport frontal collision, it can cause serious
safety standards (see page 44 ) and Canada recommend that all children injuries to a child who is
that you follow the booster seat ages 12 and under be properly unrestrained, improperly restrained,
maker’s instructions. restrained in the back seat. sitting too close to the airbag, or out
of position.
If a child who uses a booster must Even with advanced front airbags,
ride in front, move the vehicle seat the back seat is the safest place for a The side airbag also poses risks. If
as far to the rear as possible, and be child of any age or size. any part of a larger child’s body is in
sure the child is wearing the seat the path of a deploying side airbag,
belt properly. the child could receive possibly
serious injuries.
A child may continue using a booster
seat until the tops of the ears are
even with the top of the seat-back. A
child of this height should be tall
enough to use the lap/shoulder belt
without a booster.
CONTINUED

０３／０９／０３１５：４２：０６３１ＳＤＡ６１０００５７
▼
Of course, children vary widely. And Physical Size If you decide that a child can safely
while age may be one indicator of Physically, a child must be large ride up front, be sure to:
when a child can safely ride in the enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
front. There are other important properly fit (see pages 14 and 51 ). If Carefully read the owner’s manual,
factors you should consider. the seat belt does not fit properly, and make sure you understand all
with or without the child sitting on a seat belt instructions and all safety
Maturity booster, the child should not sit in information.
To safely ride in front, a child must the front.
be able to follow the rules, including Move the vehicle seat to the rear-
sitting properly, and wearing the seat most position.
belt properly throughout a ride.
Have the child sit up straight, back
against the seat, and feet on or
near the floor.
Check that the child’s seat belt is

properly positioned and secured.
Supervise the child. Even mature

children sometimes need to be
reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.

０３／０９／０３１１：３３：１７３１ＳＤＡ６１０００５８
▼
Additional Safety Precautions

Do not let a child wear a seat belt
across the neck. This could result in
serious neck injuries during a crash.
Do not let a child put the shoulder

part of a seat belt behind the back or
under the arm. This could cause
very serious injuries during a crash.
It also increases the chance that the
child will slide under the belt in a
crash and be injured.
Two children should never use the

same seat belt. If they do, they could
be very seriously injured in a crash.
Do not put any accessories on a seat

belt. Devices intended to improve a
child’s comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt can make
the belt less effective, and increase
the chance of serious injury in a
crash.

０３／０９／０３１１：３３：２７３１ＳＤＡ６１０００５９
▼
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Your vehicle’s exhaust contains With the trunk lid open, air flow can
carbon monoxide gas. You should pull exhaust gas into your vehicle’s
have no problem with carbon Carbon monoxide gas is toxic. interior and create a hazardous
monoxide entering the vehicle in Breathing it can cause condition. If you must drive with the
normal driving if you maintain your unconsciousness and even kill trunk lid open, open all the windows,
vehicle properly. you. and set the heating and cooling
Have the exhaust system inspected system as shown below.
for leaks whenever: Avoid any enclosed areas or
activities that expose you to If you must sit in your parked vehicle,
The vehicle is raised for an oil carbon monoxide. even in an unconfined area, with the
change. engine running, adjust the heating
You notice a change in the sound and cooling system as follows:
of the exhaust. High levels of carbon monoxide can
The vehicle was in an accident collect rapidly in enclosed areas, 1. Select the Fresh Air mode.
that may have damaged the under- such as a garage. Do not run the 2. Select the mode.
side. engine with the garage door closed. 3. Turn the fan on high speed.
Even with the door open, run the 4. Set the temperature control to a
engine only long enough to move the comfortable setting.
vehicle out of the garage.

０３／０９／０３１１：３４：１０３１ＳＤＡ６１０００６０
▼
Safety Labels
These labels are in the locations SUN VISOR DOORJAMBS

shown. They warn you of potential U.S. models On cars with side airbags
hazards that could cause serious U.S. models Canadian models
injury. Read these labels carefully. If
a label comes off or becomes hard to
read, contact your Honda dealer for
a replacement.
HOOD DASHBOARD Canadian models
U.S. models U.S. models only
On cars with side curtain airbags

U.S. models Canadian models
Canadian models
RADIATOR
CAP

０３／０９／０３１１：３４：１８３１ＳＤＡ６１０００６２
▼
Main Menu
Instruments and Controls
This section gives information about Temperature Gauge .................... 69 Seat .................................................... 92
the controls and displays that Fuel Gauge ................................... 70 Power Seat Adjustments ............. 92
contribute to the daily operation of Maintenance Required Driver’s Lumbar Support ............ 92
your Honda. All the essential Indicator .................................... 70 Front Seat Adjustments .............. 93
controls are within easy reach. Controls Near the Steering Driver’s Seat Manual Height
Wheel ........................................ 72 Adjustment ............................... 94
Wipers and Washers ................... 73 Driver’s Seat Power Height
Turn Signal and Headlights........ 74 Adjustment ............................... 94
Automatic Lighting Off Head Restraints ........................... 94
Feature ...................................... 75 Folding Rear Seat ........................ 95
Daytime Running Lights............. 76 Mirrors .............................................. 98
Instrument Panel Brightness ..... 76 Adjusting the Power Mirrors ..... 98
Hazard Warning........................... 76 Power Windows ............................... 99
Rear Window Defogger .............. 77 Power Window Control
Steering Wheel Adjustment ....... 78 Operations .............................. 101
Keys and Locks ................................ 79 Moonroof ........................................ 102
Keys............................................... 79 Parking Brake ................................ 103
Immobilizer System..................... 81 Sun Visor......................................... 104
Control Locations ............................ 60 Ignition Switch ............................. 82 Vanity Mirror ................................. 104
Instrument Panel ............................. 61 Door Locks ................................... 83 Interior Lights ................................ 105
Instrument Panel Lights ................. 62 Setting the Childproof Door Interior Convenience Item ........... 106
Gauges .............................................. 68 Locks ......................................... 85 Beverage Holders ...................... 107
Odometer/Outside Remote Transmitter .................... 85 Accessory Power Sockets......... 107
Temperature Indicator............ 68 Trunk ............................................ 89 Console Compartment .............. 107
Odometer ...................................... 68 Emergency Trunk Opener ......... 90 Sunglasses Holder ..................... 108
Trip Meter .................................... 69 Seat Heaters ..................................... 91 Glove Box ................................... 108
Instruments and Controls 59

０３／０９／０３１１：３４：２５３１ＳＤＡ６１０００６３
▼
Control Locations
INDICATOR LIGHTS CRUISE CONTROL (P.155)

AND GAUGES
(P.62, 68) HAZARD WARNING
MOONROOF CONTROLS LIGHTS
(P.102) (P.76)
MIRROR CONTROLS
(P.98) AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.122, 130, 140, 145)
DIGITAL CLOCK
POWER DOOR LOCK (P.153)
SWITCHES
(P.83)
HEATING/COOLING
CONTROLS
POWER WINDOW (P.110)
SWITCHES CLIMATE CONTROL
(P.99) SYSTEM
(P.119)
TRUNK RELEASE HANDLE/ HOOD RELEASE ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS

FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE HANDLE (P.107)
(P.89/165) (P.166) PARKING BRAKE
(P.103)
60 Instruments and Controls

０３／０９／０３１１：３４：３５３１ＳＤＡ６１０００６４
▼
Instrument Panel
LOW OIL PRESSURE ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM TCS ACTIVATION INDICATOR (P.64)
INDICATOR (P.62) (ABS) INDICATOR (P.63)
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR (P.67)
CRUISE CONTROL MAIN
INDICATOR (P.67) TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM
CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.64)
INDICATOR (P.62) HIGH BEAM INDICATOR (P.66)
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.67)
MAINTENANCE REQUIRED
INDICATOR (P.70)
DOOR AND TRUNK
OPEN MONITOR (P.64)
SIDE AIRBAG CUTOFF
INDICATOR (P.63)
SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
INDICATOR(P.63)
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.66)

MALFUNCTION LOW FUEL INDICATOR (P.65)
INDICATOR LAMP (P.62) LIGHTS ON INDICATOR (P.65)
PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE
SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.62) SEAT BELT INDICATOR (P.62)
The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.
０３／０９／０３１１：３４：４９３１ＳＤＡ６１０００６５
▼
Instrument Panel Lights
The instrument panel has many Low Oil Pressure U.S. Canada
indicators to give you important Indicator
information about your vehicle. The engine can be severely damaged
if this indicator flashes or stays on Parking Brake and Brake
Seat Belt Reminder Light when the engine is running. For System Indicator
complete information, see page 259 .
If you turn the ignition switch to ON This indicator has two functions:
(II) without fastening your seat belt, Charging System
the beeper starts to sound, and the Indicator 1. It comes on when you turn the
indicator starts to blink. The beeper If this indicator comes on when the ignition switch to ON (II). It is a
stops sounding several seconds later engine is running, the battery is not reminder to check the parking
but the indicator will remain lit. being charged. For more information, brake. If you drive at certain
see page 260 . speeds without fully releasing the
If you drive without your seat belt parking brake, the beeper sounds
fastened, the indicator remains on Malfunction Indicator continuously. Driving with the
and the beeper will sound every few Lamp parking brake not fully released
seconds. See page 260 . can damage the brakes and tires.
2. If it remains lit after you fully

release the parking brake while
the engine is running, or if it
comes on while driving, there
could be a problem with the brake
system. For complete information,
see page 262 .

０３／０９／０３１１：３５：０２３１ＳＤＡ６１０００６６
▼
Supplemental Restraint Side Airbag Off Indicator TCS Activation Indicator

System Indicator On all V6 models
This indicator lights briefly when Only on models equipped with side Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
you turn the ignition switch to ON airbags Indicator
(II). If it comes on at any other time, This indicator lights when you turn This indicator normally comes on for
it indicates a potential problem with the ignition switch to ON (II). If it a few seconds when you turn the
your front airbags. This indicator will comes on at any other time, it ignition switch to ON (II), and when
also alert you to a potential problem indicates that the passenger’s side the ignition switch is turned to
with your side airbags, passenger’s airbag has automatically shut off. START (III). If it comes on at any
side airbag automatic cutoff system, For complete information, see page other time, there is a problem in the
side curtain airbags, automatic seat 29 . ABS. If this happens, have your
belt tensioners, driver’s seat position vehicle checked by your Honda
sensor, or front passenger’s weight dealer. With the indicator on, your
sensors. For more information, see vehicle still has normal braking
page 28 . ability but no anti-lock. For complete
information, see page 190 .

０３／０９／０３１１：３５：１５３１ＳＤＡ６１０００６７
▼
TCS Activation Indicator Traction Control System Door and Trunk Open Monitor
On all V6 models (TCS) Indicator
This indicator has three functions: On all V6 models
1. It comes on as a reminder that you This indicator normally comes on for
have turned off the Traction a few seconds when you turn the
Control System. ignition switch to ON (II). If it comes
on and stays on when the Traction
2. It flashes when the TCS is Control System (TCS) is on, there is
regulating wheelspin. a problem with the TCS. For more The appropriate indicator comes on
information on the TCS, see page in this display if the trunk or either
3. If it comes on and stays on when 191 . door is not closed tightly.
the Traction Control System is on,
it indicates that there is a problem All the indicators in the monitor
in the TCS. display come on for a few seconds
when you turn the ignition switch to
This indicator normally also comes ON (II).
on for a few seconds when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (II). If it
comes on and stays on at any other
time, or it does not come on when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(II), there is a problem with the TCS.
Take the vehicle to your dealer to
have it checked. See page 191 for
more information on the TCS.

０３／０９／０３１１：３５：２４３１ＳＤＡ６１０００６８
▼
Turn Signal and Lights On Indicator Low Fuel Indicator

Hazard Warning
Indicators This indicator reminds you that the
The left or right turn signal indicator exterior lights are on. It comes on
blinks when you signal a lane change when the light switch is in either the
or turn. If the indicators do not blink, or position. If you turn the
or if they blink rapidly, it usually ignition switch to ACCESSORY (I)
means one of the turn signal bulbs is or LOCK (0) without turning off the
burned out (see pages 231 and 233 ). light switch, this indicator will
Replace the bulb as soon as possible, remain on. A reminder chime will
since other drivers cannot see that also sound when you open the driver’s
you are signaling. door.
LOW FUEL INDICATOR
When you turn on the Hazard
Warning button, both turn signal This indicator comes on as a
indicators blink. All turn signals on reminder that you must refuel soon.
the outside of the vehicle should
flash.

０３／０９／０３１１：３５：３５３１ＳＤＡ６１０００６９
▼
Security System Indicator ‘‘Daytime Running High Beam Indicator

Lights’’ Indicator
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR Canadian models only This indicator comes on with the
This indicator comes on when you high beam headlights. See page
turn the ignition switch to ON (II) 75 for information on the headlight
with the headlight switch off and the controls.
parking brake set. It should go off if
you turn on the headlights or release On Canadian models, this indicator
the parking brake. If it comes on at comes on with reduced brightness
any other time, it means there is a when the Daytime Running Lights
problem with the DRL. There may (DRL) are on (see page 76 ).
also be a problem with the high
beam headlights.
This indicator comes on when the

security system is set. See page
154 for more information on the
security system.

０３／０９／０３１１：３５：４８３１ＳＤＡ６１０００７０
▼
Cruise Control Main Cruise Control Indicator Immobilizer System

Indicator Indicator
Only on models equipped with Cruise Only on models equipped with Cruise This indicator comes on for a few
Control System Control System seconds when you turn the ignition
This indicator comes on when you This indicator comes on when you switch to ON (II). It will go off if you
turn on the Cruise Control Master set the cruise control. See page have inserted a properly-coded
Button. (see page 155 .) 155 for information on operating the ignition key. If it is not a properly-
cruise control. coded key, the indicator will blink
and the engine will not start (see
page 81 ).
This indicator also blinks several

times when you turn the ignition
switch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY
(I) or LOCK (0).
Washer Level Indicator
Canadian models only

This indicator comes on when the
washer fluid level is low. Add washer
fluid when you see this indicator
come on (see page 218 ).

０３／０９／０３１１：３６：００３１ＳＤＡ６１０００７１
▼
Gauges
TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER FUEL GAUGE Outside Temperature Indicator

On 4-cylinder EX models with leather
interior and all 6-cylinder EX models
MAINTENANCE This indicator displays the outside
REQUIRED temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.
INDICATOR models) or Centigrade (Canadian
TEMPERATURE models). To see the outside
GAUGE temperature, press and release the
Select/Reset knob until the
temperature is displayed.
ODOMETER/OUTSIDE TRIP METER SELECT/RESET The temperature sensor is in the

U.S. model is shown. TEMPERATURE INDICATOR KNOB front bumper. Therefore, the
temperature reading can be affected
Odometer/Outside Temperature Odometer by heat reflection from the road
Indicator The odometer shows the total dis- surface, engine heat, and the
The odometer and the outside tance your vehicle has been driven. exhaust from surrounding traffic.
temperature indicator use the same It measures miles in U.S. models and This can cause an incorrect
display. To switch the display kilometers in Canadian models. temperature reading when your
between the odometer and the It is illegal under U.S. federal law and speed is under 19 mph (30 km/h).
outside temperature, press the Canadian provincial regulations to When you start your trip, the sensor
Select/Reset knob. When you turn disconnect, reset, or alter the is not fully acclimatized, therefore it
the ignition switch to ON (II), what odometer with the intent to change may take several minutes until the
you last selected is displayed. the number of miles or kilometers proper temperature is displayed.
indicated.

０３／０９／０３１１：３６：１２３１ＳＤＡ６１０００７２
▼
Gauges
If the outside temperature is Trip Meter Temperature Gauge

incorrectly displayed, you can adjust This meter shows the number of This shows the temperature of the
it up to ±5°F (±3°C) warmer or miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) engine’s coolant. During normal
cooler. driven since you last reset it. operation, the pointer should rise
from the bottom white mark to about
NOTE: The temperature must be There are two trip meters: Trip A the middle of the gauge. In severe
stabilized before doing this and Trip B. Switch between these driving conditions, such as very hot
procedure. displays and the odometer/outside weather or a long period of uphill
temperature display by pressing the driving, the pointer may rise into the
Select the outside temperature Select/Reset knob repeatedly. Each upper half of the gauge. If it reaches
display, then press the Select/Reset trip meter works independently, so the red (Hot) mark, pull safely to the
knob for ten seconds. The following you can keep track of two different side of the road. Turn to page 257 for
sequence will appear for one second distances. instructions and precautions on
each: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, −5, −4, −3, −2, checking the engine’s cooling
−1, 0, 1 (0, 1, 2, 3, −3, −2, −1, 0, 1). When you turn the ignition switch to system.
ON (II), what you last selected is
When it reaches the desired value, displayed.
release the Select/Reset knob. You
should see the new outside To reset a trip meter, display it and
temperature displayed. then press and hold the Select/Reset
knob until the number resets to ‘‘0.0’’.
In certain weather conditions, Both trip meters will reset if the
temperature readings near freezing vehicle’s battery goes dead or is
(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is disconnected.
forming on the road surface.

０３／０９／０３１１：３６：２４３１ＳＤＡ６１０００７３
▼
Gauges
Fuel Gauge Maintenance Required Indicator

This shows how much fuel you have.
It may show slightly more or less SELECT/RESET KNOB
than the actual amount. The needle
returns to the bottom after you turn
off the ignition.
Avoid driving with an extremely low

f uel level. Running out of f uel could
cause the engine to misf ire, damaging
MAINTENANCE REQUIRED
the catalytic converter. INDICATOR
This indicator reminds you that it is 4-cylinder models

time to take your vehicle in for the For the first 8,000 miles (12,800 km)
vehicle’s scheduled maintenance after the Maintenance Required
under normal driving conditions. The Indicator is reset, it will come on for
indicator does not reflect severe two seconds when you turn the
maintenance intervals. ignition switch to ON (II).
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule

for Normal and Severe Driving
Conditions on page 204 (4-cylinder
models) or page 206 (6-cylinder
models). CONTINUED

０３／０９／０３１１：３６：３５３１ＳＤＡ６１０００７４
▼
Gauges
Except 6-cylinder models 6-cylinder models Your dealer will reset this indicator
Between 8,000 miles (12,800 km) For the first 6,000 miles (9,600 km) after completing the scheduled
and 10,000 miles (16,000 km), this after the Maintenance Required maintenance. If this maintenance is
indicator will light for two seconds Indicator is reset, it will come on for done by someone other than your
when you first turn the ignition two seconds when you turn the Honda dealer, reset the indicator as
switch to ON (II), and then flash for ignition switch to ON (II). follows.
ten seconds.
Between 6,000 miles (9,600 km) and 1. Turn off the engine.
If you exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 7,500 miles (12,000 km) this
km) without having the scheduled indicator will light for two seconds 2. Press and hold the Select/Reset
maintenance performed, this when you first turn the ignition knob in the instrument panel, then
indicator will remain on as a constant switch to ON (II), and then flash for turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
reminder. ten seconds.
3. Hold the knob for approximately
If you exceed 7,500 miles (12,000 ten seconds until the indicator
km) without having the scheduled resets.
maintenance performed, this
indicator will remain on as a constant
reminder.

０３／０９／０３１１：３６：４０３１ＳＤＡ６１０００７５
▼
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS WINDSHIELD PASSENGER AIRBAG

(P.76) WIPERS/WASHERS OFF INDICATOR
(P.73) (P.31)
HEADLIGHTS/
TURN SIGNALS
(P.74)
HAZARD
WARNING LIGHTS
(P.76)
CRUISE CONTROLS
(P.155)
MOONROOF REAR WINDOW

SWITCH DEFOGGER
(P.102) (P.77, 113, 116)
SEAT HEATERS
(P.91)
TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM TILT/TELESCOPIC HORN
(P.191) ADJUSTMENT
(P.78)

０３／０９／０３１１：３６：５１３１ＳＤＡ６１０００７６
▼
Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wiper Push the right lever up or down to LO − The wipers run at low speed.
select a position.
HI − The wipers run at high speed.
MIST − The wipers run at high
speed until you release the lever. Windshield Washer − Pull the
wiper control lever toward you and
OFF − The wipers are not activated. hold it. The washers spray until you
release the lever. The wipers run at
INT − The length of the wiper low speed, then complete one more
interval is varied automatically sweep after you release the lever.
according to the vehicle’s speed.
Vary the delay by turning the INT

TIME ring. If you turn it to the
1. MIST shortest delay, the wipers will
2. OFF change to low speed operation when
3. INT − Intermittent the vehicle speed exceeds 12 mph
4. LO − Low (20 km/h).
5. HI − High
6. Windshield Washers

０３／０９／０３１１：３６：５９３１ＳＤＡ６１０００７７
▼
Turn Signal, Headlights
Turn Signal and Headlights Turn Signal − Push down on the Headlights ON − Rotating the
left lever to signal a left turn and up switch on the left lever to the
to signal a right turn. To signal a lane ‘‘ ’’ position turns on the parking
change, push lightly on the lever in lights, taillights, instrument panel
the proper direction and hold it. The lights, side-marker lights, and rear
lever will return to center when you license plate lights. Turning the
release it or complete a turn. switch to the ‘‘ ’’ position turns
on the headlights. If you leave the
lights on with the ignition switch in
ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0), you
will hear a reminder chime when you
open the driver’s door.
When the light switch is in either of

1. Turn Signal these positions, the Lights On
2. Off indicator comes on as a reminder.
3. Parking and interior lights
4. Headlight on
5. High beams
6. Flash high beams

０３／０９／０３１１：３７：０８３１ＳＤＡ６１０００７８
▼
Headlights, Automatic Lighting Off Feature
High Beams − To turn on, push Automatic Lighting Off Feature If you remove the key from the
the lever forward until you hear a On all U.S. and Canadian models except ignition switch with the headlight
click. The blue high beam indicator DX switch on, but do not open the door
will light (see page 66 ). Pull it back This feature turns off the headlights, and get out, the lights will turn off
to return to low beams. To flash the parking lights, taillights, and license after 10 minutes.
high beams, pull the lever back plate light within 15 seconds of
lightly, then release it. The high removing the key from the ignition The lights will turn on again when
beams will stay on as long as you switch and closing the driver’s door. you unlock or open the driver’s door.
hold the lever back. If you unlock the door, but do not
This feature activates if you leave open it within 15 seconds, the lights
the headlight switch in the ‘‘ ’’ will go off. With the driver’s door
or ‘‘ ’’ position, remove the key, open, you will hear a lights-on
then open and close the driver’s door. reminder chime.

０３／０９／０３１１：３７：２０３１ＳＤＡ６１０００７９
▼
Daytime Running Lights, Instrument Panel Brightness, Hazard Warning
Daytime Running Lights Instrument Panel Brightness Hazard Warning

(Canadian Models)
With the headlight switch off, the
high beam headlights and the high
beam indicator come on with
reduced brightness when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (II) and
release the parking brake. They
remain on until you turn the ignition
off, even if you set the parking brake.
The headlights revert to normal INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS

operation when you turn them on KNOB
with the switch.
The knob on the instrument panel Push the button between the center
controls the brightness of the instru- vents to turn on the hazard warning
ment panel lights. Turn the knob to lights (four-way flashers). This
adjust the brightness. causes all four outside turn signals
and both turn indicators in the
instrument panel to flash. Use the
hazard warning lights if you need to
park in a dangerous area near heavy
traffic, or if your vehicle is disabled.

０３／０９／０３１１：３７：２６３１ＳＤＡ６１０００８０
▼
Rear Window Defogger
Make sure the rear window is clear

and you have good visibility before
starting to drive.
The defogger and antenna wires on

the inside of the rear window can be
accidentally damaged. When
cleaning the glass, always wipe side
to side.
Manual A/C type shown
The rear window defogger will clear

fog, frost, and thin ice from the
window. Push the defogger button to
turn it on and off. The indicator
above the button lights to show the
defogger is on. It also shuts off when
you turn off the ignition. You have to
turn it on again when you restart the
vehicle.

０３／０９／０３１１：３７：３４３１ＳＤＡ６１０００８１
▼
Steering Wheel Adjustment
See page 16 for important safety 1. Insert the key in the ignition
information about how to properly switch, and unlock the steering
position the steering wheel. column.
Make any steering wheel adjustment 2. Push the lever under the steering
before you start driving. column all the way down.
Adjusting the steering wheel

position while driving may
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured
in a crash. 3. Move the steering wheel up or
down, and in or out to the desired
Adjust the steering wheel only position, making sure the wheel
when the vehicle is stopped. points toward your chest, not
toward your face. Make sure you
can see the instrument panel
gauges and the indicator lights.

０３／０９／０３１１：３７：４１３１ＳＤＡ６１０００８２
▼
Steering Wheel Adjustment, Keys and Locks
4. Push the lever up to lock the Keys and Locks

steering wheel in that position.
KEY MASTER VALET KEY KEY MASTER VALET KEY
5. Make sure you have securely NUMBER KEY (LIGHT GREY) NUMBER KEY WITH (LIGHT GREY)
TAG (BLACK) TAG REMOTE
locked the steering wheel in place TRANSMITER
by trying to move it up, down, in,
and out.
Only on DX models On all models except DX

０３／０９／０３１１：３７：５０３１ＳＤＡ６１０００８３
▼
Keys and Locks
The master key fits all the locks on You should have received a key Do not drop the keys or set heavy
your vehicle. The valet key works number tag with your keys. You will objects on them.
only in the ignition and the door lock. need this key number if you ever
You can keep the trunk release have to get a lost key replaced. Use Keep the keys away from liquids.
handle, rear seat trunk access, and only Honda-approved key blanks. If they get wet, dry them
glove box locked when you leave immediately with a soft cloth.
your vehicle and the valet key at a These keys contain electronic
parking facility. circuits that are activated by the The DX model keys do not contain
Immobilizer System. They will not batteries. Do not try to take them
work to start the engine if the apart.
circuits are damaged.
Protect the keys from direct

sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.

０３／０９／０３１１：３８：００３１ＳＤＡ６１０００８４
▼
Immobilizer System
The Immobilizer System protects If the system repeatedly does not As required by the FCC:
your vehicle from theft. If an recognize the coding of your key, This device complies with Part 15 of the
improperly-coded key (or other contact your Honda dealer. FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
device) is used, the engine’s fuel following two conditions: (1) This device
system is disabled. Do not attempt to alter this system may not cause harmful interference, and
or add other devices to it. Electrical (2) this device must accept any
When you turn the ignition switch to problems could result that may make interference received, including
ON (II), the Immobilizer System your vehicle undriveable. interference that may cause undesired
indicator should come on for a few operation.
seconds, then go out. If the indicator If you have lost your key and you
starts to blink, it means the system cannot start the engine, contact a Changes or modifications not expressly
does not recognize the coding of the Honda dealer. approved by the party responsible for
key. Turn the ignition switch to compliance could void the user’s
LOCK (0), remove the key, reinsert authority to operate the equipment.
it, and turn the switch to ON (II)
again. This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
The system may not recognize your Operation is subject to the following two
key’s coding if another immobilizer conditions: (1) this device may not cause
key or other metal object (i.e. key interference, and (2) this device must
fob) is near the ignition switch when accept any interference that may cause
you insert the key. undesired operation of the device.

０３／０９／０３１１：３８：０８３１ＳＤＡ６１０００８５
▼
Ignition Switch
LOCK (0) − You can insert or ACCESSORY (I) − You can

remove the key only in this position. operate the audio system and the
To turn the key, the shift lever must accessory power sockets in this
be in Park, and you must push the position.
key in slightly. If the front wheels
are turned, the anti-theft lock may ON (II) − This is the normal key
make it difficult to turn the key. position when driving. Several of the
Firmly turn the steering wheel to the lights on the instrument panel come
left or to the right as you turn the on as a test when you turn the
key. ignition switch from ACCESSORY
(I) to ON (II).
START (III) − Use this position

The ignition switch has four Removing the key from the only to start the engine. The switch
positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY ignition switch while driving returns to ON (II) when you let go of
(I), ON (II), START (III) locks the steering. This can the key.
cause you to lose control.
Remove the key from the

ignition switch only when
parked.

０３／０９／０３１１：３８：１６３１ＳＤＡ６１０００８６
▼
Ignition Switch, Door Locks
You will hear a reminder beeper if Door Locks On all models except U.S. DX
you leave the key in the ignition Each front door has a master door
switch in the LOCK (0) or MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH lock switch. Either switch locks and
ACCESSORY (I) position and open unlocks all doors. Push the top of the
the driver’s door. Remove the key to switch to lock all doors; push the
turn off the beeper. The shift lever bottom to unlock them.
must be in Park before you can
remove the key from the ignition To lock any passenger’s door when
switch. getting out of the vehicle, push the
lock tab in and close the door.
U.S. DX
To lock the driver’s door, pull and
hold either the inside or outside door
handle, then push the lock tab down.
Release the handle, then close the
door.
On all models except DX, you can

open or close the windows by using
the key in the driver’ s door (see
page 101 ).

０３／０９／０３１１：３８：２２３１ＳＤＡ６１０００８７
▼
Door Locks
On Canadian DX models, all doors On LX and EX models, all doors can Lockout Prevention
can be locked from the outside by be locked from the outside by using With the driver’s door open and the
using the key in either front door. To the key in the driver’s door. To key in the ignition, both door lock
unlock only the driver’s door from unlock just the driver’s door, turn the switches are disabled. They are not
the outside, insert the key in the key and release it. If you turn the disabled if the driver’s door is closed.
driver’s door lock, turn the key and key again, all doors will unlock. Pushing the switch down on the
release it. If you turn the key again, open passenger’s door will lock all
all doors will unlock. All four doors doors.
will unlock when you unlock the
passenger’s door with the key.

０３／０９／０３１１：３８：３４３１ＳＤＡ６１０００８８
▼
Childproof Door Locks, Remote Transmitter
Setting the Childproof Door Remote Transmitter You can open and close all power
Locks windows from outside the vehicle
PANIC UNLOCK/ with the key. With the remote
LEVER BUTTON WINDOW- transmitter, you can open the
OPEN
BUTTON windows. Refer to Power Windows
on page 99 .
UNLOCK − Press this button once

to unlock the driver’s door. Push it
twice to unlock the other doors.
TRUNK LOCK
RELEASE BUTTON
BUTTON The ceiling light (if the ceiling light
switch is in the center position) will
come on when you press the
On all models except U.S. DX UNLOCK button. If you do not open
The childproof door locks are LOCK − Press this button once to any door, the light stays on for about
designed to prevent children seated lock all doors. Some exterior and 30 seconds, then fades out. If you
in the rear from accidentally opening interior lights will flash. You cannot relock the doors with the remote
the rear doors. Each rear door has a lock it if any door is not fully closed transmitter before 30 seconds have
lock lever near the edge. With the or key is in the ignition switch. elapsed, the light will go off
lever in the LOCK position, the door immediately.
cannot be opened from the inside On the EX model
regardless of the position of the lock When you push LOCK twice within 5
tab. To open the door, pull the lock seconds, you will hear a beep to
tab up and use the outside door verify that the security system has
handle. set.

０３／０９／０３１１：３８：４４３１ＳＤＡ６１０００８９
▼
Remote Transmitter
You cannot lock the doors with the On all models except U.S. and Canada Remote Transmitter Care
remote transmitter if any door is not DX Avoid dropping or throwing the
fully closed or the key is in the PANIC − Press this button for transmitter.
ignition switch. about one second to attract attention;
the horn will sound and the exterior Protect the transmitter from
On all models except U.S. and Canada lights will flash for about 30 seconds. extreme temperature.
DX To cancel panic mode, press any
If you unlock the doors with the other button on the remote Do not immerse the transmitter in
remote transmitter, but do not open transmitter or turn the ignition any liquid.
any of the doors within 30 seconds, switch to ON (II).
the doors automatically relock. On If you lose a transmitter, the
the EX model, the security system replacement needs to be
will also set. reprogrammed by a Honda dealer.
To open the trunk, push the Trunk

Release button for approximately
one second.
The trunk will not open if the key is

in the ignition switch.

０３／０９／０３１１：３８：５４３１ＳＤＡ６１０００９０
▼
Remote Transmitter
Replacing the Transmitter Battery

If it takes several pushes on the
button to lock or unlock the doors,
replace the battery as soon as
possible. BATTERY
Battery type: CR1616
SCREW TAB
To replace the battery: 3. Inside the transmitter, separate

the inner cover from the keypad
1. Remove the screw at the base of by releasing the two tabs on the
the transmitter with a small cover.
Phillips-head screwdriver.
4. Remove the old battery from the
2. Separate the transmitter by prying back of the inner cover, and note
its middle seam with your the polarity. Make sure the
fingernail. polarity of the new battery is the
same (＋ side facing down), then
insert it into the back of the cover.
5. Install the parts in reverse order.

０３／０９／０３１１：３９：００３１ＳＤＡ６１０００９１
▼
Remote Transmitter
As required by the FCC:

This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry

Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.

０３／０９／０３１１：３９：１２３１ＳＤＡ６１０００９２
▼
Trunk
MASTER KEY
Pull
TRUNK RELEASE HANDLE MASTER KEY
You can open the trunk in three To close the trunk, press down on To protect items in the trunk when
ways: the trunk lid. you need to give the key to someone
else:
Pull the trunk release handle to See page 174 for cargo loading and
the left of the driver’s seat. weight limit information. Keep the 1. Lock the trunk release handle
Use the master key to open the trunk lid closed at all times while with the master key. Also make
trunk lock. The valet key does not driving to avoid damaging the lid, sure the trunk pass-through cover
work in this lock. and to prevent exhaust gas from is locked (see page 97 ).
Press and hold the trunk release getting into the interior. See Carbon
button on the remote transmitter. Monoxide Hazard on page 56 . 2. Give the person the valet key.
(all models except U.S. DX)

０３／０９／０３１１：３９：２０３１ＳＤＡ６１０００９３
▼
Trunk
Emergency Trunk Opener To open the trunk, push the release

lever to the left.
Parents should decide if their

children should be shown how to use
this feature.
For more information about child

safety, see page 18 .
As a safety feature, your vehicle has

a release lever on the trunk latch so
the trunk can be opened from the
inside.

０３／０９／０３１１：３９：２９３１ＳＤＡ６１０００９４
▼
Seat Heaters
After the seat reaches a comfortable Follow these precautions whenever

temperature, select LO by pushing you use the seat heaters:
the back of the switch. This will keep
the seat warm. Use the HI setting only to heat the
seats quickly, because it draws
In HI, the heater turns off when the large amounts of current from the
seat gets warm, and turns back on battery.
after the seat’s temperature drops.
If the engine is left idling for an
In LO, the heater runs continuously. extended period, do not use the
It does not cycle with temperature seat heaters even on the LO
changes. setting. It can weaken the battery,
causing hard starting.
On EX-V6 models and EX models with
leather interior
Both front seats are equipped with
seat heaters. The ignition switch
must be in the ON (II) position to
use them. The seat heater switch is
located on each front door. Push the
front of the switch, HI, to rapidly
heat up the seat.

０３／０９／０３１１：３９：４５３１ＳＤＡ６１０００９５
▼
Seats
Power Seat Adjustment Driver’s Lumbar Support

On all V6 models, and the 4-cylinder EX On all EX and EX-V6 models
model with leather interior
See pages 12 − 13 for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position seats and seat-backs.
The controls for the adjustable

driver’s power seat are on the
outside edge of the seat bottom. You Moves the seat
can adjust the power seat with the forward and backward.
ignition switch in any position. Make
all seat adjustments before you start
driving. Moves the front of the
seat up or down and
Moving the long horizontal switch the rear of the seat up To change the lumbar support, move
adjusts the seat bottom in several or down. the lever on the right side of the
directions. The seat bottom adjusts seat-back forward or backward.
in the direction you move the switch. Raises or lowers the Keep moving the lever forward or
The short vertical switch adjusts the seat. backward until you find a suitable
seat back angle. position.
On EX-V6 model Adjusts the seat-back

The passenger’s seat also has power angle forward or
adjustable controls. backward.

０３／０９／０３１１：３９：５３３１ＳＤＡ６１０００９６
▼
Seats
The 4-cylinder EX model without Front Seat Adjustments

leather interior has a power height
adjustment for the driver’s seat. All
other seat adjustments in this model
are manual.
The U.S. DX and LX models have

manual seat adjustments (see next
column).
The front passenger’s seat in all

4-cylinder models, and the LX V-6
models adjusts manually.
To adjust the seat forward and To change the seat-back angle, pull
backward, pull up on the lever under up on the lever on the outside of the
the seat cushion’s front edge. Move seat bottom.
the seat to the desired position and
release the lever. Try to move the
seat to make sure it is locked in
position.

０３／０９／０３１１：４０：０５３１ＳＤＡ６１０００９７
▼
Seats
Driver’s Seat Manual Height Driver’s Seat Power Height Head Restraints
Adjustment Adjustment
RELEASE BUTTON
See page 14 for important safety

On 4-cylinder DX and LX models On 4-cylinder EX models without leather information and a warning about how to
The height of your driver’s seat is interior properly position the head restraints.
adjustable. To raise the seat bottom, The height of your driver’s seat is
repeatedly pull up the lever on the power adjustable. Pull up on the Your vehicle is equipped with head
outside of the seat cushion. To lower switch to raise the seat. Push it down restraints in all seating positions to
the seat, push down the lever to lower the seat. help protect you and your
repeatedly. passengers from whiplash and other
Make all adjustments before you injuries.
start driving.

０３／０９／０３１１：４０：１４３１ＳＤＡ６１０００９８
▼
Seats
They are most effective when you Folding Rear Seat

adjust them so the back of the
occupant’s head rests against the MASTER KEY
center of the restraint.
The front and rear head restraints

adjust for height. You need both
hands to adjust the restraint. Do not
attempt to adjust it while driving. To GUIDE
raise it, pull upward. To lower the
restraint, push the release button
sideways and push the restraint
down.
The back of the rear seat folds down, When storing cargo, you can move
giving you direct access to the trunk. the rear center shoulder belt out of
The seat-back can be released from the way by removing the belt from
inside the vehicle or inside the trunk. the guide.
To fold down the seat-back from

inside the vehicle, insert the master
key in the lock on the rear shelf.
Turn the key clockwise, pull down
the top of the seat-back, then release
the key.

０３／０９／０３１１：４０：２２３１ＳＤＡ６１０００９９
▼
Seats
Make sure all rear shoulder belts are Never drive with the seat-back
positioned in front of the rear seat- folded down and the trunk lid open.
back whenever the seat-back is in its See Carbon Monoxide Hazard on
upright position. page 56 .
Make sure all items in the trunk, or

items extending through the opening
Pull into the back seat, are secured.
Loose items can fly forward and
cause injury if you have to brake
hard. See Carrying Cargo on page
173 .
To release the seat-back from inside

the trunk, pull the release loop under
the trunk panel.
To lock the seat-back upright, push it

firmly against the trunk panel. Make
sure it is latched in place by pulling
on the top of the seat.

０３／０９／０３１１：４０：３１３１ＳＤＡ６１００１００
▼
Seats
Trunk Pass-through Cover For security, this cover can be

locked and unlocked only with the
KEY CYLINDER KNOB master key. To lock the cover, insert
the key and turn it clockwise.
Never drive with this cover open and

the trunk lid open.
See Carbon Monoxide Hazard on
page 56 .
LID
On all LX and EX models

The trunk pass-through cover can be
opened from either side; it folds
forward onto the center armrest.
Open the cover by sliding the knob
downward and pushing or pulling on
the cover. To close the cover, swing
it up and push firmly on the top.
Make sure it latches properly.
Make sure all items in the trunk and
those extending through the pass-
through are secured.

０３／０９／０３１１：４０：４３３１ＳＤＡ６１００１０１
▼
Mirrors
Adjusting the Power Mirrors 3. Push or pull the adjustment knob

right, left, up, or down to move the
mirror.
4. When you finish, turn the

adjustment knob to the center
(off) position. This turns off the
TAB adjustment knob to keep your
settings.
Keep the inside and outside mirrors ADJUSTMENT KNOB

clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before On all models except U.S. and Canada
you start driving. DX
The outside mirrors on DX models 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

adjust manually.
2. Turn the adjustment knob to L
The inside mirror has day and night (driver’s side) or R (passenger’s
positions. The night position reduces side).
glare from headlights behind you.
Flip the tab on the bottom edge of
the mirror to select the day or night
position.

０３／０９／０３１１：４０：５２３１ＳＤＡ６１００１０２
▼
Mirrors, Power Windows
Power Mirror Heaters Power Windows

On all Canadian models except DX
Closing a power window on
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON someone’s hands or fingers can
cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are

away from the windows before
closing them.
DRIVER’S WINDOW MAIN SWITCH

AUTO − To open the driver’s
SWITCH window, push the window switch
firmly down, then release it. The
Turn the ignition switch to ON (II) window automatically goes down all
The outside mirrors are heated to to raise or lower any window, push the way. To stop the window from
remove fog and frost. With the the switch down and hold it. Release going all the way down, pull back on
ignition switch in the ON (II) the switch when you want the the window switch briefly.
position, turn on the heaters by window to stop. Close the window by
pressing the button. The indicator in pulling the switch up and holding it. The passenger windows cannot be
the button comes on as a reminder. raised or lowered if the MAIN switch
Press the button again to turn the is OFF. Keep the MAIN switch off
heaters off. when you have children in the
vehicle so they do not injure
themselves by operating the
windows unintentionally.

０３／０９／０３１１：４１：０１３１ＳＤＡ６１００１０３
▼
Power Windows
To close the driver’s window fully, AUTO REVERSE − If the driver’s If your vehicle’s battery is
pull back the window switch firmly, window runs into any obstacle while disconnected or goes dead, or the
then release it. The window it is closing automatically, it will driver’s window fuse is removed, the
automatically goes all the way up. To reverse direction and then stop. To AUTO function will be disabled. The
stop the window from going all the close the window, remove the power window system needs to be
way up, push down on the window obstacle, then use the window switch reset after reconnecting the battery
switch briefly. again. or installing the fuse.
To open or close the driver’s window Auto reverse stops sensing when the 1. Start the engine. Push down and
partially, push down or pull back on window is almost closed. You should hold the driver’s window switch
the window switch lightly and hold it. always check that all passengers and until the window is fully open.
The window will stop when you objects are away from the window
release the switch. before closing it. 2. Pull and hold the driver’s window
switch to close the window
completely, then hold the switch
for a second or two more.
If the power windows do not operate

properly after resetting, have your
vehicle checked by a Honda dealer.

０３／０９／０３１１：４１：１５３１ＳＤＡ６１００１０４
▼
Power Windows
The power window system has a key- Power Window Control

off delay function. The windows will Operations UNLOCK BUTTON
still operate for up to ten minutes Opening the Windows with the
after you turn off the ignition. Remote Transmitter
Opening either front door cancels You can open all of the windows
the delay function. You must turn from the outside with the remote Open
the ignition switch to ON (II) again transmitter.
before you can raise or lower the Close
windows. 1. Press the UNLOCK button once
to unlock the driver’s door.
2. Press the UNLOCK button a

second time, and hold it. The
passenger’s doors unlock, and all Opening/Closing the Windows with
four windows start to open. To the Key
stop the windows, release the All models except U.S. and Canada DX
button. You can open and close the windows
with the key in the driver’s door lock.
3. To open the windows further,
press the button again. To open:
1. Insert the key in the driver’s door
You cannot close the windows with lock.
the remote transmitter.
2. Turn the key clockwise, then
release it.

０３／０９／０３１１：４１：３１３１ＳＤＡ６１００１０５
▼
Power Windows, Moonroof
3. Turn the key clockwise again, and Moonroof To tilt up the back of the moonroof,
hold it. All four windows start to press and hold the center button
open. To stop the windows, ( ). To close the moonroof,
release the key. press and hold the upper button
( ). To open the moonroof,
4. To open the windows further, turn press and hold the lower button
and hold the key again. ( ). Release the button when
the moonroof gets to the desired
To close: position. Make sure everyone’s
1. Insert the key in the driver’s door hands are away from the moonroof
lock. before opening or closing it.
2. Turn the key counterclockwise, MOONROOF SWITCH

then release it.
On all EX and EX-V6 models Opening or closing the
3. Turn the key counterclockwise The moonroof has two positions: it moonroof on someone’s hands
again, and hold it. All four can be tilted up in the back for or fingers can cause serious
windows start to close. To stop the ventilation, or it can be slid back into injury.
windows, release the key. the roof. Use the switch under the
left dashboard vent to operate the Make sure all hands and fingers
4. To close the windows further, turn moonroof. The ignition switch must are clear of the moonroof
and hold the key again. be ON (II). before opening or closing it.

０３／０９／０３１１：４１：３９３１ＳＤＡ６１００１０６
▼
Moonroof, Parking Brake
The moonroof has a key-off delay. Parking Brake NOTICE: Driving the vehicle with the
You can still open and close the parking brake applied can damage the
moonroof for up to ten minutes after rear brakes and hubs.
you turn off the ignition. The key-off
delay cancels as soon as you open
either front door. You must then
turn the ignition ON (II) for the
moonroof to operate.
If you try to open the moonroof in

below-f reezing temperatures, or when PARKING BRAKE LEVER
it is covered with snow or ice, you can
damage the moonroof panel or motor. To apply the parking brake, pull the
lever up fully. To release it, pull up
slightly, push the button, and lower
the lever. The parking brake light on
the instrument panel should go out
when the parking brake is fully
released with the engine running
(see page 62 ).

０３／０９／０３１１：４１：５０３１ＳＤＡ６１００１０７
▼
Sun Visor, Vanity Mirror
Sun Visor On EX-V6 models without side curtain Vanity Mirror

airbags
EXTENSION
To use the sun visor, pull it down. To use a vanity mirror on the back of
You can also use the sun visor at the In this position, the sun visor can be the sun visor, pull up the cover.
side window. Remove the support extended by sliding out the
rod from the clip and swing the sun extension (all models except DX and All models except the DX have
visor toward the side window. those with side curtain airbags). lighted vanity mirrors.
Make sure you put the sun visor
Do not use the sun visor extension back in place when you are getting The lights beside the mirror come
over the rear view mirror. into or out of the vehicle. on when you pull up the cover.

０３／０９／０３１１：４２：０１３１ＳＤＡ６１００１０８
▼
Interior Lights
Ceiling Light On LX models

Push on the spotlight lenses to turn
DOOR ACTIVATED DOOR ACTIVATED the light on and off.
Individual Interior Lights

ON The courtesy lights in the front
doors and around the ignition switch
come on when you open any door.
After you close the door, the ignition
OFF switch light stays on for several
seconds.
COURTESY LIGHT
The ceiling lights have a three or On EX and EX-V6

two-position switch; ON (for three- The front ceiling light also contains
position), Door Activated, and OFF. two spotlights. Push the spotlight
In the Door Activated (center or left) lenses to turn it on and off.
position, the lights come on when
you: The courtesy light between the
Open any door. spotlights comes on when you turn
Unlock the doors with the key or the parking lights on. To adjust its
remote transmitter. brightness, turn the Select/Reset
After all doors are closed tightly, the knob on the instrument panel.
light dims slightly, then fades out in
about 30 seconds.

０３／０９／０３１１：４２：０６３１ＳＤＡ６１００１０９
▼
Interior Convenience Item
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT/ FRONT DOOR POCKET/ CENTER POCKET/

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET BEVERAGE HOLDER COIN POCKET/
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
BEVERAGE HOLDER
REAR DOOR POCKET
GLOVE BOX
BEVERAGE HOLDERS
TRUNK SEAT-BACK POCKET＊＊: For some types

０３／０９／０３１１：４２：２０３１ＳＤＡ６１００１１０
▼
Beverage Holders Console Compartment

Be careful when you are using the
beverage holders. A spilled liquid RIGHT LEVER LEFT LEVER
that is very hot can scald you or your
passengers. Liquid can also spill
from the door pocket beverage
holders when you close the doors.
Use only resealable containers in the
door pockets.
Spilled liquids can damage the

upholstery, carpeting, and electrical
components in the interior. CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
Accessory Power Sockets To open the console compartment, You can put small items in the tray
These sockets are intended to supply pull up on the right lever and lift the located in the console compartment
power for 12 volt DC accessories armrest. lid. To use the tray, pull up on the
that are rated 120 watts or less (10 left lever and lift up the armrest.
amps). To close, lower the armrest, and
None of the sockets will power an push it down until it latches. On models except DX, the tray in the
automotive type cigarette lighter console compartment has a coin
element. When more than one holder.
socket is being used, the combined
power rating of the accessories
should be 120 watts or less
(10 amps).

０３／０９／０３１１：４２：３２３１ＳＤＡ６１００１１１
▼
Sunglasses Holder Glove Box
An open glove box can cause

serious injury to your passenger
in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat
belt.
Always keep the glove box

closed while driving.
GLOVE BOX
On all models except U.S. and Canada Open the glove box by pulling the
DX handle to the left. Close it with a firm
To open the sunglasses holder, push push. Lock or unlock the glove box
on the front edge. Make sure the with the master key.
holder is closed while you are driving.
The glove box light comes on when
Some larger styles of sunglasses the parking lights are on.
may not fit in the holder.

０３／０９／０３１１：４２：４０３１ＳＤＡ６１００１１２
▼
Main Menu
Features
On all models except 4-cylinder LX Vents, Heating, and A/C .............. 110 To Stop Playing a Tape ............. 142
model Air Flow Buttons ............................ 112 Tape Search Functions ............. 143
Vents, Heating, and A/C .............. 115 Caring the Tape and Player...... 144
Your Honda has an anti-theft audio Dual Temperature Control ........... 119 Playing the XMTM Satellite
system that requires a code number Climate Control Sensors ............... 121 Radio ....................................... 145
to enable it. Playing the Radio ........................... 122 Satellite Digital Radio ................ 145
To the Radio ............................... 124 To Play XMTM Satellite Radio.... 146
The security system helps to dis- To Select a Station ..................... 124 To Select a Channel................... 146
courage vandalism and theft of your Adjusting the Sound .................. 127 Satellite Radio Signals ............... 148
Honda. Radio Frequencies ..................... 128 Receiving Satellite Radio
Radio Reception ......................... 128 Service..................................... 149
The heating and air conditioning Playing a CD ................................... 130 Steering Wheel Controls .............. 151
systems in your Honda provide a Playing a CD, CD Changer ........... 132 Radio Theft Protection.................. 152
comfortable driving environment in To Play a CD .............................. 132 Setting the Clock ........................... 153
all weather conditions. To Stop Playing a CD ................ 135 Security System ............................. 154
Removing CD’s from the Cruise Control ................................ 155
The standard audio system has Changer .................................. 135 HomeLink Universal
many features. This section de- Operating the Optional CD Transceiver................................. 158
scribes those features and how to Changer .................................. 136
use them. CD Player Error Messages .......... 137
CD Changer Error Messages ...... 138
Protecting your CDs...................... 139
General Information .................. 139
Protecting CD’s .......................... 139
Playing a Tape ................................ 140
To Play a Tape ........................... 142
Features 109
０３／０９／０３１１：４２：４９３１ＳＤＡ６１００１１３
▼
Vents, Heating, and A/C
All models except EX-L and EX-V6 EX-L and EX-V6 Models without Navigation System
SET TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
TEMPERATURE FAN SPEED TEMPERATURE

FAN CONTROL DIAL RECIRCULATION BUTTON CONTROL DIAL INDICATOR CONTROL DIAL
(DRIVER’S SIDE) (PASSENGER’S SIDE)
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
MODE
BUTTON
FAN CONTROL
BUTTONS AIR
REAR WINDOW CONDITIONING
DEFOGGER BUTTON
BUTTON AUTO BUTTON
AIR
CONDITIONING WINDSHIELD REAR WINDOW
BUTTON DEFROST BUTTON OFF BUTTON DEFOGGER BUTTON
MAX A/C BUTTON MODE BUTTONS DUAL BUTTON WINDSHIELD

DEFROST BUTTON
RECIRCULATION BUTTON
110 Features
０３／０９／０３１１：４２：５５３１ＳＤＡ６１００１１４
▼
EX-L and EX-V6 Models with Navigation System (U.S. Vehicles Only)
SET TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
A/C BUTTON
AIR CONDITIONING ICONS
MODE ICONS
FAN CONTROL ICONS
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
TEMPERATURE CONTROL BUTTONS (PASSENGER’S SIDE)
BUTTONS (DRIVER’S SIDE)
AUTO BUTTON REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTON
OFF BUTTON WINDSHIELD DEFROST BUTTON
DUAL BUTTON RECIRCULATION BUTTON
Features 111
０３／０９／０３１１：４３：０９３１ＳＤＡ６１００１１５
▼
Air Flow Buttons
Heating and Cooling On EX-L and EX-V6 models with the For vehicles with the navigation
Air conditioning is optional for DX navigation system, you can manually system, press the DUAL button and
models. Your Honda dealer can select the fan speed by pressing the the green indicator will come on.
install a Honda air conditioning A/C button next to the display and The driver and passenger can each
system that is designed to fit in your then, pressing the fan control icons. select the temperature control
vehicle. buttons (▲ or ▼) to the desired
Temperature Control setting.
What Each Control Does On all models except EX-L and EX-V6
For EX-L and EX-V6 with navigation with Navigation System When the indicator in the DUAL
system, see page 117 for Automatic Turning this dial clockwise increases button is off, both sides adjust to the
Climate Control and Manual the temperature of the airflow. same temperature.
Operations information.
On EX-L and EX-V6 models
Fan Control The driver and passenger can select
On all models except EX-L and independent temperature settings by
EX-V6, turn this dial clockwise to selecting the DUAL button.
increase fan speed and increase the
airflow. For vehicles without navigation
system, push the DUAL button.
On EX-L and EX-V6 models without When the indicator in the button is
the navigation system, you can lit, turn the dials to adjust the
manually select the fan speed by temperature.
pressing the fan control buttons. The
fan speed is represented by vertical
bars in the display.
112 Features
０３／０９／０３１１：４３：２０３１ＳＤＡ６１００１１６
▼
Air Flow Buttons
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button EX-L and EX-V6 Recirculation Button

On all models except EX-L and When you turn the A/C off, the When the light in or above the
EX-V6, this button turns the air system cannot regulate the inside button is on, air from the vehicle’s
conditioning on and off. The light temperature if you set the interior is sent throughout the
above the button is on when the A/C temperature control buttons below system again. When the light is off,
is on. the outside temperature. air is brought in from the outside of
the vehicle (Fresh Air mode).
On vehicles without the navigation
system, press the A/C button to turn The outside air intakes for the
on the A/C. You will see A/C ON or heating and cooling system are at
A/C OFF in the display. the base of the windshield. Keep this
area clear of leaves and other debris.
On vehicles with the navigation
system, press the A/C button to view The system should be left in Fresh
the display. Touching ‘‘ON’’ or Air mode under almost all conditions.
‘‘OFF’’ in the display turns the air Keeping the system in Recirculation
conditioning on and off. You will see mode, particularly with the A/C off,
A/C ON or A/C OFF in the display. can cause the windows to fog up.
Switch to Recirculation mode when
driving through dusty or smoky
conditions, then return to Fresh Air
mode.
Rear Window Defogger Button

This button turns the rear window
defogger off and on (see page 77 ).
Features 113
０３／０９／０３１１：４３：４０３１ＳＤＡ６１００１１７
▼
Air Flow Buttons
Mode Control When you select or , MAX A/C Button

Use the mode control buttons or the system automatically switches to All models except EX-L and EX-V6
icons to select the vents the air flows Fresh Air mode and turns on the The system automatically
from. Some air will flow from the A/C. In these modes, the A/C stays turns on the A/C and switches to
dashboard corner vents in all modes. on with the indicator off. Recirculation mode. Air flows from
the center and side vents in the
Air flows from the center When you select , the system dashboard.
and corner vents in the dashboard. automatically switches to Fresh Air
mode. Ventilation
Air flow is divided between The flow-through ventilation system
the vents in the dashboard and the On EX-L and EX-V6 model draws in outside air, circulates it
floor vents. For Vehicles without Navigation System through the interior, then exhausts it
through vents near the rear window.
Air flows from the floor Each time you press the MODE
vents. button, the display shows the mode 1. Set the temperature control dial or
selected. the button to the lower limit.
Air flow is divided between 2. Make sure the A/C is off.
the floor vents and the defroster For Vehicles with Navigation System 3. Select and Fresh Air mode.
vents at the base of the windshield. 4. Set the fan to the desired speed.
Press the A/C button to view the
Air flows from the defroster display, then touch any of the mode
vents at the base of the windshield. icons on the display.
114 Features
０３／０９／０３１１：４３：５６３１ＳＤＡ６１００１１８
▼
Using the Heater Using the A/C EX-L and EX-V6 with Navigation System
The heater uses engine coolant to Air conditioning places an extra load 1. Press the A/C button, the Manual
warm the air. If the engine is cold, it on the engine. Watch the engine Operation A/C screen will appear.
will be several minutes before you coolant temperature gauge (see page 2. Select the ON icon on the display.
feel warm air coming from the 69 ). If it moves near the red zone, 3. Select the desired temperature
system. turn off the A/C until the gauge and MODE selections. If the
reads normally. outside air is humid, select the
Except EX-L and EX-V6 with Navigation Recirculation mode. If the outside
System Except EX-L and EX-V6 with Navigation air is dry, select Fresh Air mode.
1. Select . System
When you select , the system 1. Turn on the A/C by pressing the If the interior is very warm, you can
automatically switches to the button. The light above or in the cool it down more rapidly by partially
Fresh Air mode. button comes on when a fan speed opening the windows, turning on the
2. Set the fan to the desired speed. is selected. A/C, and setting the fan to
3. Adjust the warmth of the air with 2. Make sure the temperature maximum speed in Fresh Air mode.
the temperature control dial. control dial or button is set to their
lower limit. On all models except EX-L and EX-V6
EX-L and EX-V6 with Navigation System 3. Select . To cool the interior with MAX A/C:
1. Press the A/C button, the manual 4. If the outside air is humid, select 1. Set the fan to the desired speed.
operation of A/C screen will Recirculation mode. If the outside 2. Select the MAX A/C mode.
appear. air is dry, select Fresh Air mode. The system automatically turns on
2. Select the desired mode and fan 5. Set the fan to the desired speed. the A/C, selects and
speed icons on the display. switches to Recirculation mode.
3. Adjust for warmth with the 3. Make sure the temperature
temperature buttons (▲ or ▼). control dial is all the way to the left.
Features 115
０３／０９／０３１１：４４：１０３１ＳＤＡ６１００１１９
▼
Dehumidify the Interior To Defog and Defrost To Remove Exterior Frost or Ice
Air conditioning, as it cools, removes To remove fog from the inside of the From the Windows
moisture from the air. When used in windows: 1. Select . The system
combination with the heater, it automatically switches to Fresh
makes the interior warm and dry. 1. Set the fan to the desired speed or Air mode and turns on the A/C.
high for faster defrosting. The A/C indicator will not come
1. Switch the fan on. 2. Select . When you select on in U.S. vehicles.
2. Turn on the air conditioning. , the system automatically 2. Select .
3. Select and Fresh Air mode. switches to Fresh Air mode and 3. Set the fan and temperature
4. Adjust the temperature control turns on the A/C. The A/C controls to maximum level.
dial or buttons to your preference. indicator will not come on in U.S.
vehicles. To clear the windows faster, you can
This setting is suitable for all driving 3. Set the temperature control dial or close the dashboard corner vents by
conditions whenever the outside buttons so the airflow feels warm. rotating the wheel below it. This will
temperature is above 32°F (0°C). 4. Select to help clear the send more warm air to the
rear window. windshield defroster vents. Once the
5. To increase airflow to the windshield is clear, select the Fresh
windshield, close the side vents. Air mode to avoid fogging the
windows.
When you switch to another mode
from , the A/C stays on. For your safety, make sure you have
Press the A/C button to turn it off. a clear view through all the windows
before driving.
116 Features
０３／０９／０３１１：４４：２５３１ＳＤＡ６１００１２０
▼
To Cool or Heat Automatically Using Automatic Climate Control The system automatically selects the
On EX-L and EX-V6 models EX-L and EX-V6 models proper mix of conditioned and/or
The Automatic Climate Control 1. Press the AUTO button. heated air to raise or lower the
system can adjust the fan speed and interior temperature to the
airflow levels to maintain the interior Without Navigation System temperature you selected.
temperature you select. 2. Set the desired temperature by
turning the Temperature Control If you set the temperature to its
EX-L and EX-V6 models with Navigation dial. You will see AUTO in the lowest limit, (Lo) or its highest limit,
System system’s display. (Hi) the system runs at full cooling
In the AUTO mode, the vehicle’s or heating only. It does not regulate
interior temperature is With Navigation System the interior temperature.
independently regulated for the 2. Set the desired temperature by
driver and passenger. If the driver’s pressing the ▲ to raise the In cold weather, the fan will not
side of the vehicle is getting too temperature or ▼ to lower the come on automatically until the
much sun, the system will adjust to a temperature. The selected heater starts to develop warm air.
lower temperature. temperature will show in the upper
display. Dual Temperature Control − When
the indicator in the Dual button is on,
the driver’s side and passenger’s side
temperature can be controlled
independently (see page 119 ).
Features 117
０３／０９／０３１１：４４：３６３１ＳＤＡ６１００１２１
▼
Manual Operation To Turn Everything Off If you press OFF, the Climate
You can manually select various Press the OFF button. However, a Control system shuts off completely.
functions of the Climate Control lack of air flow can cause the −Keep the system completely off
System when it is in AUTO. All other windows to fog up. It is for short periods only.
features remain automatically recommended that you keep the fan −To keep stale air and mustiness
controlled. on at all times so stale air and from collecting, you should have
moisture do not build up in the the fan running at all times.
EX-L and EX-V6 without Navigation interior and cause fogging.
System With Navigation System
Manual selections will cause the When the Climate Control System is
word AUTO in the display to go out. turned OFF, the temperature in the
upper display will also turn off.
EX-L and EX-V6 with Navigation System
If you press the A/C button next to Except for EX and EX-V6 models
the display, the manual selections Turning the fan speed and
will show in the display. Manual temperature control dials all the way
selection will cause the light in the to the left shuts off the system
AUTO button to turn off. completely.
118 Features
０３／０９／０３１１：４４：４８３１ＳＤＡ６１００１２２
▼
Dual Temperature Control
On EX-L and EX-V6 models Without Navigation System

Without Navigation System
Your vehicle has two temperature
control dials, one for the driver, and
one for the passenger.
With Navigation System DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE
Your vehicle has four temperature TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE
control buttons, two for the driver, CONTROL DIAL CONTROL DIAL
and two for the passenger. DUAL BUTTON
The driver’s side and the passenger’s
side can be controlled independently
by adjusting these dials or buttons With Navigation System
when the green indicator in the
DUAL button is lit.
Temperature Control Dials/Buttons

Push AUTO or . The selected
temperatures appear in the upper
display. For vehicles when the
indicator in the DUAL button is off, DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE
you can adjust both sides to the TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE
same temperature by adjusting the CONTROL BUTTONS CONTROL BUTTONS
driver’s side temperature control dial DUAL BUTTON
or buttons.
CONTINUED
Comfort and Convenience Features 119

０３／０９／０３１１：４４：５５３１ＳＤＡ６１００１２３
▼
Dual Temperature Control
To set the driver’s side temperature

to a different value than the
passenger’s, press the DUAL button,
then turn the driver’s control dial or DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE
press the ▲ or ▼ buttons on the
driver’s side. To set the passenger’s
side to a different value than the
driver’s, turn the passenger’s control
dial or press the ▲ or ▼ buttons on
the passenger’s side. You can adjust
the passenger’s side without
pressing the DUAL button first.
When you set the temperature to its

lower limit or its upper limit, it will be
displayed as ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’.
120 Comfort and Convenience Features

０３／０９／０３１１：４５：０１３１ＳＤＡ６１００１２４
▼
Climate Control Sensors
Sunlight Sensor/Temperature
Sensor
SUNLIGHT SENSOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
The climate control system has two

sensors. A sunlight sensor is in the
top of the dashboard, and a
temperature sensor is next to the
steering column. Do not cover the
sensors or spill any liquid on them.
Features 121
０３／０９／０３１１：４５：１３３１ＳＤＡ６１００１２５
▼
Playing the Radio
DX and LX Models EX-L, EX-V6 Models with Navigation System

STEREO INDICATOR SCAN BUTTON (U.S. Vehicles Only)
AM/FM
BUTTON A.SEL
BUTTON
STEREO UPPER
INDICATOR DISPLAY
TUNE BAR
SEEK BAR
SOUND
BUTTON AM/FM
BUTTON AUDIO
DISPLAY
PRESET BARS PWR/VOL KNOB BUTTON
SCAN
EX, EX-V6 and LX-V6 Models BUTTON
without Navigation System PRESET
ICONS
STEREO INDICATOR SEEK BAR
AM/FM
BUTTON A.SEL
BUTTON PWR/VOL TUNE/
KNOB SOUND
TUNE BAR KNOB
PRESET AUTO SELECT SCAN SOUND

BARS ICON ICON ICON
SEEK BAR
SOUND
BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON PWR/VOL KNOB
122 Features
０３／０９／０３１１：４５：２１３１ＳＤＡ６１００１２６
▼
Playing the Radio
EX-L, EX-V6 Models EX-L, EX-V6 Models with Navigation System

without Navigation System (U.S. Vehicles Only)
STEREO INDICATOR
STEREO INDICATOR PRESET BARS
UPPER
AM/FM DISPLAY
BUTTON
A.SEL AM/FM
BUTTON BUTTON
AUDIO
DISPLAY
TUNE SCAN BUTTON
BAR BUTTON
PRESET
SEEK BAR ICONS
SEEK BAR
SCAN BUTTON SOUND BUTTON TUNE/
SOUND
PWR/VOL KNOB KNOB
PWR/VOL AUDIO SCAN SOUND ICON
KNOB SELECT ICON
ICON
Features 123
０３／０９／０３１１：４５：３３３１ＳＤＡ６１００１２７
▼
Playing the Radio
To Play the Radio To Select a Station SCAN − The SCAN function

The ignition switch must be in the You can use any of five methods to samples all stations with strong
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. find radio stations on the selected signals on the selected band. To
Turn the system on by pushing the band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTO activate it, press the SCAN button,
PWR/VOL knob or the AM/FM SELECT, and the preset bars or then release it. You will see SCAN in
button. Adjust the volume by turning icons. the display. The system will scan for
the same knob. a station with a strong signal. When
TUNE − Use the TUNE bar or it finds one, it will stop and play that
For Vehicles with Navigation System knob to tune the radio to a desired station for about five seconds.
Pushing the AUDIO DISPLAY frequency. Press the side of the
button will also turn on the system. bar or turn the knob to the right to If you do nothing, the system will
tune to a higher frequency, and the then scan for the next strong station
The band and frequency that the side or turn the knob to the left and play it for five seconds. When it
radio was last tuned to is displayed. to tune to a lower frequency. plays a station you want to listen to,
To change bands, press the AM/FM press the SCAN button again.
button. On the FM band, ST will be SEEK − The SEEK function
displayed if the station is broadcast- searches up and down from the
ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction on current frequency to find a station
AM is not available. with a strong signal. To activate it,
press the or side of the
XM Satellite Radio information is bar, then release it.
available on page 145 .
124 Features
０３／０９／０３１１：４５：４３３１ＳＤＡ６１００１２８
▼
Playing the Radio
Preset − Each preset bar or icon 3. Pick the preset number (1 − 6) The preset frequencies will be lost if
can store one frequency on AM, and you want for that station. Press your vehicle’s battery goes dead, is
two frequencies on FM. the left or right side of the bar or disconnected, or the radio fuse is
icon and hold it until you hear a removed.
1. Select the desired band, AM or beep.
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two frequencies with each preset 4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a total
bar or icon. of six stations on AM and twelve
For Vehicles with Navigation System stations on FM.
Push the AUDIO DISPLAY button
to view the preset icons.
2. Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCAN

function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
Features 125
０３／０９／０３１１：４５：４９３１ＳＤＡ６１００１２９
▼
Playing the Radio
AUTO SELECT − If you are If you do not like the stations Auto
traveling far from home and can no Select has stored, you can store
longer receive your preset stations, other frequencies on the preset bars
you can use the Auto Select feature or icons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, or
to find stations in the local area. SCAN function to find stations, then
store them in the preset bars or
Press the A. SEL button or touch the icons as described previously.
Auto Select icon. A. SEL will flash in
the display, and the system will go To turn off Auto Select, press the A.
into scan mode for several seconds. SEL button or icon. This restores the
It stores the frequencies of six AM, presets you originally set.
and twelve FM stations in the preset
bars (1 − 6) or icons. You will see a
‘‘0’’ displayed after pressing a preset
bar or icon if Auto Select cannot find
a strong station for every preset bar
or icon.
126 Features
０３／０９／０３１５：４２：１９３１ＳＤＡ６１００１３０
▼
Playing the Radio
Adjusting the Sound For Vehicles without Navigation System The system will automatically return
Press the SOUND button or icon, or Each mode is shown in the display as the display to the selected audio
press the TUNE knob repeatedly to it changes. Turn the VOLUME knob mode about five seconds after you
display the Bass (BAS), Treble or touch the icon to adjust the stop adjusting a mode. On vehicles
(TRE), Balance (BAL), and Fader setting to your liking. When the level with navigation system, touch the
(FAD) settings. On vehicles with reaches the center, you will see ‘‘C’’ RETURN icon to go back to the
navigation system, touch the in the display. audio screen.
SOUND icon or press the TUNE
knob. For Vehicles with Navigation System
(U.S. vehicles only)
Balance/Fader − These two Touch the arrows next to the BAS or
modes adjusts the strength of the TRE icons. The adjustment shows
sound coming from each speaker. you the current setting.
BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,
while FAD adjusts the front-to-back Touch the left or right bars on the
strength. sound grid. Balance is equalized
when the vertical lines are centered
Treble/Bass − Use the TRE/BAS on the grid.
modes to adjust the tone to your
liking. Touch the front or rear bars on the
sound grid. The fader is equalized
On Vehicles with Navigation System when the horizontal lines are
If you want to adjust the sound while centered on the grid.
the radio/CD is playing, push the
AUDIO DISPLAY button, then touch
the SOUND icon in the display.
Features 127
０３／０９／０３１１：４６：１２３１ＳＤＡ６１００１３１
▼
Playing the Radio
Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

Your Honda’s radio can receive the How well your Honda’s radio
complete AM and FM bands. receives stations is dependent on
Those bands cover these frequen- many factors, such as the distance
cies: from the station’s transmitter,
nearby large objects, and atmos-
AM band: pheric conditions.
530 to 1,710 kilohertz
FM band: A radio station’s signal gets weaker
87.7 to 107.9 megahertz as you get farther away from its
transmitter. If you are listening to an
Radio stations on the AM band are AM station, you will notice the sound
assigned frequencies at least ten volume becoming weaker, and the
kilohertz apart (530, 540, 550). station drifting in and out. If you are Driving very near the transmitter of
Stations on the FM band are listening to an FM station, you will a station that is broadcasting on a
assigned frequencies at least 0.2 see the stereo indicator flickering off frequency close to the frequency of
megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3). and on as the signal weakens. the station you are listening to can
Eventually, the stereo indicator will also affect your radio’s reception.
Stations must use these exact go off and the sound will fade You may temporarily hear both
frequencies. It is fairly common for completely as you get out of range of stations, or hear only the station you
stations to round-off the frequency in the station’s signal. are close to.
their advertising, so your radio could
display a frequency of 100.9 even
though the announcer may identify
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’
128 Features
０３／０９／０３１１：４６：１９３１ＳＤＡ６１００１３２
▼
Playing the Radio
As required by the FCC:

Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Radio signals, especially on the FM Radio reception can be affected by

band, are deflected by large objects atmospheric conditions such as
such as buildings and hills. Your thunderstorms, high humidity, and
radio then receives both the direct even sunspots. You may be able to
signal from the station’s transmitter, receive a distant radio station one
and the deflected signal. This causes day and not receive it the next day
the sound to distort or flutter. This is because of a change in conditions.
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving. Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.
Features 129
０３／０９／０３１１：４６：３１３１ＳＤＡ６１００１３３
▼
Playing a CD
DX and LX Models EX, EX-V6 Models with Navigation System

(U.S. Vehicles Only)
SCAN/RPT BUTTON
CD RDM UPPER DISPLAY
BUTTON BUTTON
PRESET
BAR CD BUTTON
CD LOAD
SEEK/SKIP INDICATOR
BAR SCAN AUDIO
CD SLOT BUTTON DISPLAY
BUTTON
EJECT BUTTON PWR/VOL KNOB
SEEK/SKIP
EX, EX-V6 and LX-V6 Models BAR
without Navigation System
CD BUTTON PRESET BAR RPT BUTTON PWR/VOL

KNOB
SEEK/SKIP RDM
BAR BUTTON CD SLOT CHANGE
DISC
EJECT BUTTON
BUTTON LOAD
BUTTON TRACK DISC RANDOM
CD SLOT RPT RPT ICON
LOAD ICON ICON
BUTTON CD LOAD INDICATOR
CD LOAD INDICATOR EJECT BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON PWR/VOL KNOB
130 Features
０３／０９／０３１１：４６：３８３１ＳＤＡ６１００１３４
▼
Playing a CD
EX-L, EX-V6 Models EX-L, EX-V6 Models with Navigation System

without Navigation System (U.S. Vehicles Only)
UPPER DISPLAY
CD BUTTON RPT BUTTON

CD BUTTON
AUDIO
DISPLAY
BUTTON
RDM
BUTTON SEEK BAR
EJECT
BUTTON PWR/VOL
SEEK/SKIP KNOB
BAR CD SLOT
LOAD BUTTON CD SLOT

CHANGE
CD LOAD DISC
INDICATOR LOAD BUTTON
BUTTON
RANDOM
PWR/VOL KNOB ICON
TRACK
RPT DISC RPT EJECT
ICON ICON BUTTON
CD LOAD INDICATOR
Features 131
０３／０９／０３１１：４６：４７３１ＳＤＡ６１００１３５
▼
Playing a CD, CD Changer
To Play a CD DX, LX, and LX-G Models in Canada For vehicles with Satellite Radio
To load or play CD’s, the ignition Insert a CD into the CD slot. The To listen to satellite radio when a CD
switch must be in the ACCESSORY drive will pull the CD in the rest of is playing, press the CD/SAT button.
(I) or ON(II) position. the way to play it. When the system
reaches the end of the disc, it will To play the tape when a CD is
You operate the CD player/CD return to the beginning and play the playing, insert a tape in the player
changer with the same controls used disc again. (optional). If a tape is in the player,
for the radio. To select the CD press the AUX button. Press the CD
player/CD changer, press the CD To play the radio when a CD is button again to switch back to the
button. The number of the track playing, press the AM/FM button. CD player. The cassette player is
playing is shown in the display. With Press the CD button again to switch optional on all U.S. models.
the in-dash CD changer, the disc and back to the CD player.
track numbers are displayed. The If you turn the system off while a CD
system will continuously play a CD is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
until you change modes. knob or by turning off the ignition,
the disc will stay in the drive. When
you turn the system back on, the CD
will begin playing where it left off.
132 Features
０３／０９／０３１１：４６：５７３１ＳＤＡ６１００１３６
▼
For Vehicle with in-dash CD Changer You can also load a CD into an empty On vehicles with in-dash CD changer
1. Press the LOAD button until you position while a CD is playing. Select To select a different disc, press the
hear a beep and see ‘‘LOAd’’ in the the empty position (the disc number appropriate side of a preset bar
display. indicator is not highlighted) and (1−6) or use the Preset 5 (DISC −)
2. The disc number for an empty press the appropriate preset bar or to select the previous disc or Preset
position is highlighted and the red touch a disc icon. The current CD 6 (DISC ＋) to select the next disc in
light starts blinking. stops playing and starts the loading sequence. On vehicles with
3. Insert the disc into the CD slot sequence. The CD just loaded will navigation system, touch the
when the green CD load indicator play. appropriate disc icon or press the ▲
comes on. Insert it only about or ▼ side of the CH/DISC bar. If
halfway; the drive will pull it in the You operate the CD changer with you select an empty position in the
rest of the way. You will see the same controls used for the radio. CD changer, the system will try to
‘‘BUSY’’ in the display as the CD The numbers of the disc and track load the CD in the next available slot.
load indicator turns red and blinks playing are shown in the display. On
as the CD is loaded. vehicles with navigation system,
4. When the CD load indicator turns these numbers also appear in the
green and ‘‘LOAD’’ appears in the upper display.
screen again, insert the next CD in
the slot.
5. Repeat steps 1 through 3 until all
six positions are loaded. If you are
not loading all six positions, the
system begins playing the last CD
loaded.
Features 133
０３／０９／０３１１：４７：０９３１ＳＤＡ６１００１３７
▼
For Vehicles without Navigation System RANDOM − Press to play the EX-L, EX-V6 Models with Navigation
SEEK/SKIP − Push the to tracks in random order. You will see System
play the next track on the disc. Push RDM in the display. Press the RDM To use the controls, press the
the once to replay the track in button again to return to normal play. AUDIO DISPLAY button, the control
play, press twice to replay the icons will appear on the screen.
previous track. SCAN − The SCAN function
To remove rapidly within a track, samples all the tracks on the TRACK SCAN − Press the icon or
press and hold the , or the selected disc in the order they are SCAN button, to get a 10 second
button. recorded. To activate it, press and sampling of each track on the
release the SCAN button. You will current CD. Press the icon or button
REPEAT − Press to continuously see SCAN in the display, and you will again to turn it off.
replay a track. You will see RPT in get a 10 second sampling of each
the display. Press the RPT button track on the selected CD. Press the DISC SCAN − Touch to get a 10
again to turn it off. SCAN button again to get out of the second sampling of the first song of
system. each disc in the CD changer. Touch
the icon again to turn it off.
TRACK RPT − Touch to

continuously play the same song on
the CD. Press the icon again to stop
the function.
134 Features
０３／０９／０３１１：４７：２１３１ＳＤＡ６１００１３８
▼
DISC RPT − Touch the icon to EX-L, EX-V6 Models Removing CD’s from the Changer
continuously replay the current CD. Press the AM/FM or SAT/CD EX, EX-V6 Models
Touch again to turn it off. button to switch to the radio or To remove the disc currently playing,
satellite radio while a CD is playing. press the EJECT button. When a
TRACK RDM − Touch the icon to Press the CD button again to play disc is removed from a slot, the
play the current CD in random order. the CD. system automatically begins the load
Touch again to stop. sequence so you can load another
If a tape is in the optional tape player, CD in that position. If you do not
CH DISC − Selects an icon and press the AUX button to switch to remove the disc from the changer
plays the disc. the tape while a CD is playing. Press within 15 seconds, the system
the CD button again to switch back returns to the previous mode (AM/
To Stop Playing a CD to the CD player. FM or satellite radio). The disc will
On models with CD player or changer reload into the system and will
Press the eject button ( ) to If you turn the system off while a CD remain there in a pause mode.
remove the CD. If you eject the CD, is playing, the CD will stay in the
but do not remove it from the slot, drive. When you turn the system To remove a different disc from the
the system will automatically reload back on, the CD will begin playing changer, first select it with the
the CD after 15 seconds and put it in where it left off. appropriate preset bar or icon. When
pause mode. To begin playing, press that CD begins playing, press the
the CD button. eject button. Continue pressing the
EJECT button to remove all the discs
from the changer.
Features 135
０３／０９／０３１１：４７：２９３１ＳＤＡ６１００１３９
▼
Operating the Optional CD Load the desired CDs in the On LX model, if there are no CDs in
Changer magazine, and load the magazine in the changer, the display will flash,
DX, LX, LX-V6, and EX models the changer according to the and you will have to select another
An optional six or eight disc CD instructions that came with the unit. mode.
changer is available for your vehicle
from your Honda dealer. To select the CD changer, press the
This disc changer uses the same CD button. The disc and track
controls used for the in-dash CD numbers will be displayed. To select
player/changer or the radio. a different disc, use Preset 5 (DISC
−), for a previous disc; or Preset 6
(DISC ＋), to select the next disc in
sequence.
If you select an empty slot in the

magazine, the changer will search
for the next available CD to load and
play.
136 Features
０３／０９／０３１１：４７：３９３１ＳＤＡ６１００１４０
▼
CD Player Error Messages
If you see an error message in the

display while playing a CD player, Error Message Cause Solution
find the cause in the chart to the
right. If you cannot clear the error Press the eject button and pull out the disc.
message, take the vehicle to your or
FOCUS Error Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CD
Honda dealer. player.
Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
Press the eject button and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for damage or deformation.
Mechanical Error If the CD cannot be pulled out or the error
or
indication does not disappear after the disc is
ejected, see your Honda dealer.
Do not try to force the disc out of the player.
High Temperature Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Features 137
０３／０９／０３１１：４７：４７３１ＳＤＡ６１００１４１
▼
CD Changer Error Messages
If you see an error message in the

display while operating the CD Error Message Cause Solution
changer, find the cause in the chart
to the right. If you cannot clear the Press the CD eject button and pull out the CDs.
error message, take the vehicle to a Check for an error indication. Insert the CDs
Honda dealer. FOCUS Error again. If the code does not disappear or the
CDs cannot be pulled out, consult your Honda
dealer.
Press the CD eject button and pull out the CDs.
Check for an error indication. Insert the CDs
Mechanical Error again. If the code does not disappear or the
CDs cannot be pulled out, consult your Honda
dealer.
No CD in the CD Insert CDs.
Changer
High Temperature Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
138 Features
０３／０９／０３１１：４８：０１３１ＳＤＡ６１００１４２
▼
Protecting Your CDs
General Information Protecting CDs

When using CD-R discs, use only When a CD is not being played, store
high quality CDs labeled for audio it in its case to protect it from dust
use. and other contamination. To prevent
warpage, keep CDs out of direct
When recording a CD-R, the sunlight and extreme heat.
recording must be closed for it to
be used by the CD players. To clean a CD, use a clean soft cloth.
Wipe across the CD from the center
CD-RW discs will not work in this to the outside edge.
unit.
A new CD may be rough on the
Play only standard round CDs. inner and outer edges. The small
Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the plastic pieces causing this roughness Handle a CD by its edges; never
drive or cause other problems. can flake off and fall on the re- touch either surface. Do not place
cording surface of the CD, causing stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.
Handle your CDs properly to skipping or other problems. Remove These, along with contamination
prevent damage and skipping. See these pieces by rubbing the inner from fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip
this page. and outer edges with the side of a pens, can cause the CD to not play
pencil or pen. properly, or possibly jam in the drive.
Never try to insert foreign objects in

the CD player or the magazine.
Features 139
０３／０９／０３１１：４８：０９３１ＳＤＡ６１００１４３
▼
Playing a Tape (U.S. Vehicles)
DX and LX Models EX, EX-V6 Models with Navigation System

TAPE DIRECTION INDICATOR
RPT INDICATOR
RPT INDICATOR TAPE DIRECTION INDICATOR
RPT
CD/AUX BUTTON
BUTTON
AUDIO
SEEK/SKIP DISPLAY
BAR BUTTON
PRESET BARS PWR/VOL KNOB
CD/AUX
BUTTON
EX, EX-V6 and LX-V6 Models

SEEK/SKIP CH/DISC
CD/AUX BAR BAR
BUTTON RPT
BUTTON
PWR/VOL
KNOB
SEEK/SKIP
BAR
PROG ICON RPT ICON NR ICON
140 Features
０３／０９／０３１１：４８：１７３１ＳＤＡ６１００１４４
▼
All U.S. EX Leather Interior Models All U.S. EX Leather Interior Models with Navigation System
RPT INDICATOR TAPE DIRECTION UPPER

INDICATOR DISPLAY
CD/SAT RADIO
RPT BUTTON
CD/AUX BUTTON
BUTTON AUDIO
DISPLAY
BUTTON
SEEK BAR CH/DISC

BAR
SEEK BAR
TUNE/
PWR/VOL SOUND
KNOB KNOB
PROG ICON RPT ICON NR ICON
Features 141
０３／０９／０３１１：４８：２６３１ＳＤＡ６１００１４５
▼
To Play a Tape Dolby＊ noise reduction turns on To Stop Playing a Tape

Optional on all U.S. models when you insert a tape. The To remove the tape, press the
The ignition switch must be in indicator will light in the EJECT button on the cassette player.
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II). Make display. If the tape was not recorded If you want to turn the player off,
sure the open side of the tape is in Dolby, turn it off by pressing the press the PWR/VOL knob or turn
facing right, then insert the tape Preset 4 (NR) side of the preset bar off the ignition. The tape will remain
most of the way into the slot. The or touching the NR icon. Dolby in the drive.
system will pull the tape in the rest remains off until you press the When you turn the system back on,
of the way, and begin to play it. preset bar or the icon again. the tape player will be in pause mode.
Press the Preset 3 (PLAY/PROG)
＊
The tape direction indicator will light Dolby noise reduction side of the preset bar or touch the
to show you which side of the tape is manufactured under license from PROG icon on vehicles with
playing. The ▲ indicates the side Dolby laboratories licensing navigation system to resume play.
you inserted upward in now playing. Corporation. ‘‘Dolby’’ and the
If you want to play the other side, double-D symbol are trademarks To switch to the radio or CD player
press the Preset 3 (PLAY/PROG) of the Dolby Laboratories while a tape is playing, press the
side of the preset bar or press the Licensing Corporation. AM/FM, or CD/AUX button or CD/
AUDIO DISPLAY button and touch SAT RADIO button. To change back
the PROG icon. When the player to the tape player, push the CD/AUX
reaches the end of the tape, it will button or CD/SAT RADIO button.
automatically reverse direction and
play the other side.
142 Features
０３／０９／０３１１：４８：３５３１ＳＤＡ６１００１４６
▼
Tape Search Functions SKIP − Press side to find the Vehicles with Navigation System
FF/REW − To rewind the tape, beginning of the current song or If you see the error message
push the Preset 1 (REW) side of the passage. Press side to find the ‘‘ ’’ on the display, press the
preset bar or the upper side (▲) of beginning of the next song or tape eject button to remove the tape
the CH DISC bar. You will see REW passage. When the system reaches from the unit. Make sure the tape is
in the display. To fast forward the the beginning of a song or passage, it not damaged. If the tape will not
tape, push the Preset 2 (FF) side of begins to play it. eject or the error message stays on
the preset bar. You will see FF dis- after the tape ejects, take your
played. Press the Preset 1, 2, or 3 REPEAT − Press the RPT button vehicle to your Honda dealer.
side of the bars or the lower side or icon to continuously play a song or
(▼) of the CH DISC bar to take the passage. You will see RPT displayed.
system out of rewind or fast forward. The track will repeat until you press
the RPT button or icon again.
EX and EX-V6 with Navigation System
FF/REW − To rewind the tape NOTE: The SKIP and REPEAT
push the upper side (▲) of the CH functions use silent periods on the
DISC bar. To fast forward the tape, tape to find the end of a song or
push the lower side (▼) of the CH passage. These features may not
DISC bar. Press either side of the work if there is almost no gap
PROG icon in the audio display to between selections, a high noise
take the system out of rewind or fast level, or a silent period in the middle
forward. of a selection.
Features 143
０３／０９／０３１１：４８：４３３１ＳＤＡ６１００１４７
▼
Caring for the Tape and Player If you do not clean the tape player If the tape is loose, tighten it by
The tape player picks up dirt and regularly, it may eventually become turning the hub with a pencil or your
oxides from the tape. This impossible to remove the finger. If the label is peeling off,
contamination builds up over time contamination with a normal remove it or it could cause the tape
and cause the sound quality to cleaning kit. Your Honda dealer has to jam in the player. Never try to
degrade. To prevent this, you should a cleaning kit available. insert a warped or damaged tape in
clean the player after every 30 hours the player.
of use. Use 100-minute or shorter tapes.
Tapes longer than that may break or Store tapes in their cases to protect
jam the drive. them from dust and moisture. Never
place tapes where they will be
exposed to direct sunlight, high heat,
or high humidity. If a tape is exposed
to extreme heat or cold, let it reach a
moderate temperature before
inserting it into the player.
Never try to insert foreign object

into the tape player.
144 Features
０３／０９／０３１１：４８：５４３１ＳＤＡ６１００１４８
▼
Playing the XMTM Satellite Radio
Satellite Digital Radio All U.S. EX-L and EX-V6 Models All U.S. EX-L and EX-V6 Models
EX-L and EX-V6 Models without Navigation System with Navigation System
Your vehicle is capable of receiving CATEGORY/CHANNEL
XMTM Satellite Radio anywhere in the CATEGORY/CHANNEL MODE INDICATOR
United States except Hawaii, Alaska, MODE INDICATOR SAT RADIO AUDIO
and Canada. BUTTON DISPLAY
SAT RADIO DISP BUTTON
BUTTON BUTTON SCAN
XM is a registered trademark of BUTTON
XM Satellite Radio, Inc.
Satellite radio is available in U.S.

models only.
TUNE
SEEK/ BAR
SKIP/
BAR PRESET SEEK/
BARS SKIP/
BAR
SCAN
BUTTON PWR/VOL TUNE
KNOB KNOB
PWR/VOL KNOB PRESET

SCAN ICON ICONS
MODE ICON
Features 145
０３／０９／０３１１：４９：０９３１ＳＤＡ６１００１４９
▼
To Play XMTM Satellite Radio DISP − TUNE −

The ignition must be in the Vehicles with Navigation System Vehicles with Navigation System
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. Press and release this button to Turn the TUNE knob to change
Turn the system on: change the display. The display will channels. Turn the knob right for
Vehicles with Navigation System change in the following sequence: higher numbered channels and left
Push any of the following: PWR/ channel name, channel number, for lower numbered channels.
VOL knob, the CD/SAT, or AUDIO category, artist name, and music title. Vehicles without Navigation System
button. Press the TUNE bar to change
Vehicles without Navigation System channel selections. Press for
Push any of the following: PWR/ higher numbered channels and
VOL knob or the CD/SAT button. for lower numbered channels.
Turn the PWR/VOL knob to adjust

the volume.
To Select a Channel
When in the satellite radio mode,
you can use any of three methods to
find channels: TUNE, SEEK/SKIP
(CATEGORY), and SCAN.
146 Features
０３／０９／０３１１：４９：１９３１ＳＤＡ６１００１５０
▼
SEEK/SKIP (CATEGORY)− The SCAN − The SCAN function For Vehicles with Navigation System
SEEK/SKIP function selects the samples all channels for 5 seconds. Once your XM channels are preset,
various categories in XM, such as To activate the function, push the pressing the CH DISC button will
Jazz/Blues, Rock, Classical, etc. SCAN button. Push it again to get select your preset channels.
Push the to change the out of the sequence.
category forward. Push the to
change the category backward. To Preset − Each preset icon or button
search for channels within a can store one channel in XM1 and
category, turn the TUNE knob one in XM2.
clockwise or press the TUNE bar 1. Push the SAT button, you will see
. XM1 or XM2.
2. Use the TUNE, SEEK or SCAN
function to tune the radio to a
desired channel.
3. Pick a preset icon or button and
hold it until you hear a beep.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a total
of six stations on XM1 and XM2.
CONTINUED
Features 147
０３／０９／０３１１：４９：２６３１ＳＤＡ６１００１５１
▼
Satellite Radio Signals

Satellite radio receives signals from
Signal may be two satellites to produce clear, high-
blocked by quality digital reception. It offers
mountains or
large obstacles many channels in several categories.
to the south. Along with a large selection of
different types of music, satellite
radio also allows you to view channel
and category selections in the audio
display.
The XM satellites are in orbit over

the equator; therefore, objects south
SATELLITE of the vehicle may cause satellite
reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas. Satellite signals
are more likely to be blocked by tall
buildings and mountains the farther
north you travel from the equator.
GROUND
REPEATER
148 Features
０３／０９／０３１１：４９：３９３１ＳＤＡ６１００１５２
▼
Depending on where you drive, you As required by the FCC: Receiving Satellite Radio Service
may experience reception problems. Changes or modifications not expressly If your XM Radio service has expired
Interference can be caused by any of approved by the party responsible for or you purchased your vehicle from
these conditions: compliance could void the user’s a previous owner, you can listen to a
authority to operate the equipment. sampling of the broadcasts available
Driving on an east/west road with on XM Satellite Radio. With the
a mountain on the south side of ignition switch in the ACCESSORY
the road. (I) or ON (II) position, push the
Driving on the north side of a PWR/VOL knob to turn on the audio
large commercial truck on an system and press the CD/SAT
east/west road button. A variety of music types and
Driving in the tunnels styles will play.
Driving on a road beside a vertical
wall, steep cliff or hill to the south
of you
Driving on the lower level of a
multi-tiered road
Driving on a single lane road
alongside dense trees taller than
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you
There may be other geographic

situations that could affect satellite
radio reception.
CONTINUED
Features 149
０３／０９／０３１１：４９：４７３１ＳＤＡ６１００１５３
▼
If you decide to purchase XM While awaiting activation, make sure

Satellite Radio service, contact XM your vehicle remains in an open area
Radio at www.xmradio.com, or at with good reception. Once your
1-800-852-9696. You will need to give audio system is activated, ‘‘category’’
them your radio I.D. number and or ‘‘CH’’ will appear in the display
your credit card number. and you will be able to listen to XM
Radio broadcasts. XM Radio will
To get your XM Satellite radio ID continue to send an activation signal
number: to your vehicle for at least 12 hours
Turn the TUNE knob until ‘‘0’’ from activation request. If the
appears in the display. Your ID service has not been activated after
number will appear in the display. 36 hours, contact XM Radio.
After you have registered with XM

Radio, keep your audio system in the
SAT Radio mode while you await
activation. This should take about 30
minutes.
150 Features
０３／０９／０３１１：４９：５６３１ＳＤＡ６１００１５４
▼
Steering Wheel Controls
On all EX models and V6 models The VOL button adjusts the volume If you are playing a CD, the system
up (▲) or down (▼). Press the top skips to the beginning of the next
MODE BUTTON or bottom of the button and hold it track each time you press the top
until the desired volume is reached, (＋) of the CH button. Press the
then release it. bottom (−) to return to the
beginning of the current track. Press
The MODE button changes the it twice to return to the previous
mode. Pressing the button track. You will see the disc and track
repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM, numbers in the display.
XM1, XM2, or CD (if a CD is loaded).
If you are playing a tape in the
If you are listening to the radio, use optional cassette player, press the
VOL BUTTON CH BUTTON the CH button to change station. top (＋) of the CH button to advance
Each time you press the button up to the next selection. Press the
Three controls for the audio system (＋) or down (−), the system goes bottom (−) to go back to the
are mounted in the steering wheel to the next preset station on the previous selection. The system
hub. These let you control basic band you are listening to. senses a silent period, then resumes
functions without removing your playing.
hand from the wheel.
Features 151
０３／０９／０３１１：５０：０７３１ＳＤＡ６１００１５５
▼
Radio Theft Protection
On EX and EX-V6 models If your vehicle’s battery is discon- the same way.
Your vehicle’s audio system will nected or goes dead, the audio
disable itself if it is disconnected system will disable itself. If this If you make a mistake entering the
from electrical power for any reason. happens, you will see ‘‘CODE’’ in the code, do not start over; complete the
To make it work again, you must frequency display the next time you five-digit sequence, then enter the
enter a specific five-digit code using turn on the system. Use the preset correct code. You have ten tries to
the preset bars or the TUNE knob. buttons to enter the five-digit code. enter the correct code. If you are
Because there are hundreds of The code is located on the radio code unsuccessful in ten attempts, you
number combinations possible from card included in your Owner’s must then leave the system on for 1
the five-digit, making the system Manual kit. When it is entered hour before trying again.
work without knowing the exact correctly, the radio will start playing.
code is nearly impossible. If the code card is lost, a Honda
If your vehicle is equipped with a dealer can access your code with the
You should have received a card that navigation system, press and release your radio’s serial number. To
lists your audio system code number the TUNE knob; the number ‘‘0’’ access the serial number, turn the
and serial number. It is best to store appears on the display. radio on. It must display ‘‘CODE’’,
this card in a safe place at home. In then turn the radio off. Push the
addition, you should write the audio If ‘‘0’’ is the first digit in your code, preset 1, preset 6, and power buttons
system’s serial number in this press and release the TUNE knob to at the same time, then quickly
Owner’s Manual. store it. release.
If you should happen to lose the card, If ‘‘0’’ is not the first digit in your You will have to store your favorite
you must obtain the code number code, turn the TUNE knob left or stations on each side of the preset
from a Honda dealer. To do this, you right until the first digit is displayed. bars (1 − 6) after the system begins
will need the system’s serial number. Press and release the TUNE knob to working. Your original settings were
store it. Enter the remaining digits lost when power was disconnected.
152 Features
０３／０９／０３１１：５０：１７３１ＳＤＡ６１００１５６
▼
Setting the Clock
On models without Navigation System EX, EX-V6 and LX-V6 Models

If your vehicle’s battery is without Navigation System shown
disconnected or goes dead, you will DIGITAL CLOCK
need to set the clock.
Press and hold the SOUND button.

Change the hours by pressing the
until you hear a beep. The displayed
time begins to blink H (Preset 4) PRESET BARS
side of the bar until the numbers
advance to the desired time. Change
the minutes by pressing the M
(Preset 5) side of the bar until the
numbers advance to the desired time. SOUND BUTTON
When you are finished, press the
SOUND button again to set the time. You can quickly set the time to the For example:
nearest hour. Pressing and holding 1:06 would RESET to 1:00.
the SOUND button, then pressing 1:52 would RESET to 2:00.
the R (Preset 6) side of the bar sets
the clock back to the previous hour. On models with Navigation System
If the displayed time is after the half Refer to the Navigation System
hour, the clock sets the clock Owner’s Manual to set up the time.
forward to the beginning of the next
hour.
Features 153
０３／０９／０３１１：５０：２６３１ＳＤＡ６１００１５７
▼
Security System
On EX, all V6, and Canadian LX-G SECURITY SYSTEM LIGHT With the system set, you can still
models open the trunk with the master key
The security system helps to protect or the remote transmitter without
your vehicle and valuables from theft. triggering the alarm. The alarm will
The horn sounds and a combination sound if the trunk lock is forced, or
of headlights, parking lights, side the trunk is opened with the trunk
marker lights and taillights flashes if release handle.
someone attempts to break into your
vehicle or remove the radio. This The security system will not set if
alarm continues for two minutes, the hood, trunk, or any door is not
then the system resets. To reset an fully closed. If the system will not set,
alarming system before the two check the Door Monitor on the
minutes have elapsed, unlock either instrument panel (see page 61 ), to
front door with the key or the Once the security system is set, see if the doors and trunk are fully
remote transmitter. opening any door (without using the closed. Since it is not part of the
key or the remote transmitter), the monitor display, manually check the
The security system automatically hood, or the trunk will cause it to hood.
sets 15 seconds after you lock the sound. It also sounds if the radio is
doors, hood, and trunk. For the removed from the dashboard or the Do not attempt to alter this system
system to activate, you must lock the wiring is cut. or add other devices to it.
doors from the outside with the key,
lock tab, door lock switch, or remote
transmitter. The security system
light on the instrument panel starts
blinking immediately to show you
the system is setting itself.
154 Features
０３／０９／０３１１：５０：３５３１ＳＤＡ６１００１５８
▼
Cruise Control
Except for U.S. DX model Using the Cruise Control 3. Press and release the DECEL/
Cruise control allows you to maintain SET button on the steering wheel.
a set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h) CRUISE CONTROL MASTER BUTTON The CRUISE CONTROL light on
without keeping your foot on the the instrument panel comes on to
accelerator pedal. It should be used show the system is now activated.
for cruising on straight, open
highways. It is not recommended for
city driving, winding roads, slippery
roads, heavy rain, or bad weather.
CANCEL DECEL/SET RES/ACCEL

Improper use of the cruise BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON
control can lead to a crash.
1. Push in the Cruise Control Master
Use the cruise control only Button on the steering wheel. The
when traveling on open CRUISE MAIN light on the
highways in good weather. instrument panel comes on.
2. Accelerate to the desired cruising

speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).
Features 155
０３／０９／０３１１：５０：４８３１ＳＤＡ６１００１５９
▼
Cruise Control
The cruise control may not hold the Push on the accelerator pedal. Ac- Tap the brake or clutch pedal
set speed when you are going up and celerate to the desired cruising lightly with your foot. The
down hills. If your speed increases speed and press the DECEL/SET CRUISE CONTROL light on the
going down a hill, use the brakes to button. instrument panel will go out.
slow down. This will cancel the When the car slows to the desired
cruise control. To resume the set To increase your speed in very speed, press the DECEL/SET
speed, press the RES/ACCEL button. small amounts, tap the RES/ button.
The CRUISE CONTROL light on the ACCEL button. Each time you do
instrument panel will come back on. this, your vehicle will speed up Even with the cruise control turned
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). on, you can still use the accelerator
Changing the Set Speed pedal to speed up for passing. After
You can increase the set cruising You can decrease the set cruising completing the pass, take your foot
speed in any of these ways: speed in any of these ways: off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
will return to the set cruising speed.
Press and hold the RES/ACCEL Press and hold the DECEL/SET
button. When you reach the button. Release the button when Resting your foot on the brake or
desired cruising speed, release the you reach the desired speed. clutch pedal will cause the cruise
button. control to cancel.
To slow down in very small
amounts, tap the DECEL/SET
button repeatedly. Each time you
do this, your vehicle will slow
down about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
156 Features
０３／０９／０３１１：５０：５６３１ＳＤＡ６１００１６０
▼
Cruise Control
Cancelling the Cruise Control Resuming the Set Speed Pressing the Cruise Control Master
You can cancel the cruise control in When you push the CANCEL button, Switch turns the system off and
any of these ways: or tap the brake or clutch pedal, the erases the previous cruising speed.
system will remember the
Tap the brake or clutch pedal. previously-set cruising speed. To
return to that speed, accelerate to
Push the CANCEL button on the above 25 mph (40 km/h) then press
steering wheel. and release the RES/ACCEL button.
The CRUISE CONTROL light comes
Press the Cruise Control Master on. The vehicle will accelerate to the
Switch. same cruising speed as before.
Features 157
０３／０９／０３１１：５１：０５３１ＳＤＡ６１００１６１
▼
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
On EX-V6 model The HomeLink Transceiver stores Important Safety Precautions

The HomeLink Universal the code in a permanent memory. Always refer to the opening
Transceiver built into your vehicle There should be no need to retrain instructions and safety information
can be programmed to operate up to HomeLink if your vehicle’s battery that came with your garage door
three remote controlled devices goes dead or is disconnected. opener or other equipment you
around your home, such as garage intend to operate with HomeLink
doors, lighting, or home security If your garage door opener was opening. If you do not have this
systems. manufactured before April 1982, you information, contact the
may not be able to program manufacturer of the equipment.
General Information HomeLink Universal Transceiver to
If you are training HomeLink to operate it. They do not have a safety
operate a garage door or gate, you feature that causes the motor to stop
should unplug the motor for that and reverse if an obstacle is detected
device during training. Repeatedly during closing, increasing the risk of
pressing the remote control button injury.
could burn out the motor.
HomeLink is a registered
trademark of Johnson ControlsTM.
158 Features
０３／０９／０３１１：５１：１５３１ＳＤＡ６１００１６２
▼
Training HomeLink If you are training the second or

Before you begin − If you just third buttons, go directly to Step 1.
received your vehicle and have not
trained any of the buttons in 1. Unplug the garage door opener
HomeLink before, you should erase motor from the house current.
any previously learned codes before
training the first button. To do this, 2. Hold the end of the garage door
press and hold the two outside opener remote control 2 to 5
buttons on HomeLink Transceiver inches from HomeLink. Make
for about 20 seconds, or until the red sure you are not blocking your
light flashes. Release the buttons, view of the red light in HomeLink.
then proceed to Step 1.
3. Press and hold the remote control

button and one of the HomeLink
buttons at the same time.
CONTINUED
Features 159
０３／０９／０３１１：５１：２４３１ＳＤＡ６１００１６３
▼
Canadian Owners: The remote control If the button does not work, repeat Training With a Rolling Code
you are training from may stop trans- this procedure to train it again. If it System
mitting after two seconds. This is not still does not work, you may have a For security purposes, newer garage
enough for HomeLink to learn the variable or rolling code garage door opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’
code. Release and press the button door opener. See if you do by or variable code. Information from
on the remote control every two pressing and holding the the remote control and the garage
seconds until HomeLink has learned HomeLink transceiver button you door opener are needed before
the code. just trained. If the red light blinks HomeLink can operate the garage
for two seconds, then stays on, door opener.
5. The red light in HomeLink should you have a rolling code garage
begin flashing. It will flash slowly door opener. Go to ‘‘Training With The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’
at first, then rapidly. a Rolling Code System’’. procedure trains HomeLink to the
proper garage door opener code.
6. When the red light flashes rapidly, 8. Repeat these steps to train the The following procedure
release both buttons. HomeLink other two HomeLink buttons to synchronizes HomeLink to the
should have learned the code from operate any other remotely- garage door opener so they send and
the remote control. controlled devices around your receive the correct codes.
home (lighting, automatic gate,
7. Plug in the garage door opener security system, etc.).
motor, then test the HomeLink
Transceiver button by pushing it.
160 Features
０３／０９／０３１１：５１：３３３１ＳＤＡ６１００１６４
▼
1. Make sure you have properly TRAINING BUTTON 4. Press and hold the button on
completed the ‘‘Training HomeLink for 3 − 4 seconds.
HomeLink’’ procedure.
5. Press and hold the HomeLink
2. Find the ‘‘Training’’ button on your button again for 3 − 4 seconds.
garage door opener unit. The This should turn off the training
location will vary, depending on light on the garage door opener
the manufacturer. unit. (Some systems may require
you to press the button up to three
times.)
6. Press the HomeLink button again.

It should operate the garage door.
3. Press the Training button on the
garage door opener unit until the
light next to the button comes on,
then release it. The light may blink,
or come on and stay on. You then
have approximately 30 seconds to
complete the following steps.
Features 161
０３／０９／０３１１：５１：４３３１ＳＤＡ６１００１６５
▼
Erasing Codes Customer Assistance As required by the FCC:

To erase the codes stored in all three If you have problems with training This device complies with Part 15 of the
buttons, press and hold the two the HomeLink Wireless Control FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
outside buttons until the red light System, or would like information on following two conditions: (1) This device
begins to flash, then release the home products that can be operated may not cause harmful interference, and
buttons. by the transmitter, call (800) 355- (2) this device must accept any
3515. On the Internet, go to www. interference received, including
You should erase all three codes homelink.com. interference that may cause undesired
before selling the vehicle. operation.
Retraining a Button Changes or modifications not expressly

To train an already programmed approved by the party responsible for
transceiver button with a new device, compliance could void the user’s
you do not have to erase all the authority to operate the equipment.
memory. Train the selected button
over the existing memory code This device complies with Industry
following the steps under Training Canada Standard RSS-210.
HomeLink . Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
162 Features
０３／０９／０３１１：５１：４９３１ＳＤＡ６１００１６６
▼
Main Menu
Before Driving
Before you begin driving your Honda, Break-in Period .............................. 164
you should know what gasoline to Gasoline Type ................................ 164
use, and how to check the levels of Service Station Procedures .......... 165
important fluids. You also need to Refueling..................................... 165
know how to properly store luggage Opening and Closing the
or packages. The information in this Hood ........................................ 166
section will help you. If you plan to Oil Check .................................... 168
add any accessories to your vehicle, Engine Coolant Check .............. 169
please read the information in this Fuel Economy ................................ 170
section first. Improving Fuel Economy ......... 170
Accessories..................................... 171
Modifications.................................. 172
Modifying Your Vehicle............ 172
Carrying Cargo .............................. 173
Carrying Cargo in the Trunk ... 175
Carrying Cargo in the
Passenger Compartment ...... 175
Before Driving 163

０３／０９／０３１１：５２：０２３１ＳＤＡ６１００１６７
▼
Break-in Period, Gasoline Type
Break-in Period Gasoline Type Use of gasoline with these additives

Help assure your vehicle’s future Your Honda is designed to operate may adversely affect performance,
reliability and performance by paying on unleaded gasoline with a pump and cause the Malfunction Indicator
extra attention to how you drive octane number of 86 or higher. Use Lamp on your instrument panel to
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km). of a lower octane gasoline can cause come on. If this happens, contact
During this period: a persistent, heavy, metallic rapping your authorized Honda dealer for
noise in the engine that can lead to service.
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid mechanical failure.
acceleration. Some gasoline today is blended with
We recommend gasolines containing oxygenates such as ethanol or
Do not change the oil until the detergent additives that help prevent MTBE. Your vehicle is designed to
scheduled maintenance time. fuel system and engine deposits. operate on oxygenated gasoline
containing up to 10 percent ethanol
Avoid hard braking for the first Using gasoline containing lead will by volume and up to 15 percent
200 miles (300 km). damage your vehicle’s emissions MTBE by volume. Do not use
controls. This contributes to air gasoline containing methanol.
You should also follow these pollution.
recommendations with an For further important fuel-related
overhauled or exchanged engine, or In addition, in order to maintain good information, please refer to your
when the brakes are replaced. performance, fuel economy, and Quick Start Guide.
emissions control, we strongly
recommend, in areas where it is
available, the use of gasoline that
does NOT contain manganese-based
fuel additives such as MMT.
164 Before Driving

０３／０９／０３１１：５２：１３３１ＳＤＡ６１００１６８
▼
Service Station Procedure
Refueling 3. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.

You may hear a hissing sound as
Gasoline is highly flammable pressure inside the tank escapes.
and explosive. You can be The fuel fill cap is attached to the
Push burned or seriously injured fuel filler with a tether. Put the
when handling fuel. attachment on the fuel fill cap into
the slit on the fuel fill door.
Stop the engine and keep
heat, sparks, and flames 4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel
away. nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
Handle fuel only outdoors. not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leave
Wipe up spills immediately. some room for the fuel to expand
with temperature changes.
1. Park with the driver’s side closest If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off
to the gas pump. even though the tank is not full,
there may be a problem with your
2. Open the fuel fill door by pulling vehicle’s fuel vapor recovery
on the handle to the left of the system. The system helps keep
driver’s seat. fuel vapors from going into the
atmosphere. Consult your dealer.
TETHER
FUEL FILL CAP

CONTINUED
Before Driving 165

０３／０９／０３１１：５２：２４３１ＳＤＡ６１００１６９
▼
5. Screw the fuel fill cap back on Opening and Closing the Hood
until it clicks at least three times.
If you do not properly tighten the HOOD RELEASE HANDLE LATCH
cap, the Malfunction Indicator
Lamp may come on (see page
260 ).
6. Push the fuel fill door closed until

it latches.
To Open the Hood: 2. Put your fingers under the front

1. Park the vehicle, and set the edge of the hood to the right of
parking brake. Pull the hood the center. Slide your hand to the
release handle located under the left until you feel the hood latch
lower left corner of the dashboard. handle. Push this handle up to
The hood will pop up slightly. release it. Lift up the hood.
If the hood latch handle moves stiffly,

or if you can open the hood without
lifting the handle, the mechanism
should be cleaned and lubricated.
166 Before Driving

０３／０９／０３１１：５２：３４３１ＳＤＡ６１００１７０
▼
cm) above the fender, then let it is securely latched.

drop. Make sure it is securely
SUPPORT ROD latched.
3. 4-cylinder models
Pull the support rod out of its clip
and insert the end into the hole on 6-cylinder models
the front of the hood near the Lift the hood up most of the way.
center. The hydraulic supports will lift it
up the rest of the way and hold it
To Close the Hood: up.
4-cylinder models
Lift it up slightly to remove the To Close the Hood:
support rod from the hole. Put the Lower it to about a foot (30 cm)
support rod back into its holding clip. above the fender, then press down
Lower the hood to about a foot (30 firmly with your hands. Make sure it
Before Driving 167

０３／０９／０３１１：５２：４５３１ＳＤＡ６１００１７１
▼
Oil Check
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
DIPSTICK DIPSTICK
4-cylinder models (Orange Handle) 6-cylinder models (Orange Loop) 4-cylinder models
Wait a few minutes after turning the 2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean 4. Remove the dipstick again and
engine off before you check the oil. cloth or paper towel. check the level. It should be
between the upper and lower
1. Remove the dipstick. 3. Insert it all the way back in its hole. marks.
If it is near or below the lower mark,

see Adding Oil on page 214 .
168 Before Driving

０３／０９／０３１１：５２：５５３１ＳＤＡ６１００１７２
▼
Engine Coolant Check

RESERVE TANK MAX RESERVE TANK
MAX
UPPER MARK MIN
LOWER MARK
6-cylinder models 4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models MIN
Look at the coolant level in the Refer to Owner’s Maintenance

radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is Checks on page 203 for information
between the MAX and MIN lines. If on checking other items in your
it is below the MIN line, see Adding Honda.
Engine Coolant on page 219 for
information on adding the proper
coolant.
Before Driving 169

０３／０９／０３１１：５３：０５３１ＳＤＡ６１００１７３
▼
Fuel Economy
Improving Fuel Economy Always drive in the highest gear

Always maintain your vehicle possible.
according to the maintenance
schedule. See Owner’s Try to maintain a constant speed.
Maintenance Checks (see page Every time you slow down and
203 ). speed up, your vehicle uses extra
fuel. Use the cruise control when
For example, an underinflated tire appropriate.
causes more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’
which uses fuel. Combine several short trips into
one.
The build-up of snow or mud on
your vehicle’s underside adds The air conditioning puts an extra
weight and rolling resistance. load on the engine which makes it
Frequent cleaning helps your fuel use more fuel. Use the fresh-air
mileage and reduces the chance of ventilation when possible.
corrosion.
Drive moderately. Rapid

acceleration, abrupt cornering and
hard braking use more fuel.
170 Before Driving

０３／０９／０３１１：５３：１５３１ＳＤＡ６１００１７４
▼
Accessories
Modifying your vehicle, or installing Before installing any accessory:

some non-Honda accessories, can
make your vehicle unsafe. Before Improper accessories or Make sure the accessory does not
you make any modifications or add modifications can affect your obscure any lights, or interfere
any accessories, be sure to read the vehicle’s handling, stability, and with proper vehicle operation or
following information. performance, and cause a performance.
crash in which you can be hurt
Accessories or killed. Be sure electronic accessories do
Your dealer has Honda accessories not overload electrical circuits
that allow you to personalize your Follow all instructions in this (see page 265 ) or interfere with
vehicle. These accessories have owner’s manual regarding proper operation.
been designed and approved for your accessories and modifications.
vehicle, and are covered by warranty. Have the installer contact your
Honda dealer for assistance before
Although aftermarket accessories When properly installed, cellular installing any electronic accessory.
may fit on your vehicle, they may not phones, alarms, two-way radios, and
meet factory specifications, and low-powered audio systems should
could adversely affect your vehicle’s not interfere with your vehicle’s
handling and stability (see computer controlled systems, such
‘‘Modifications’’ on page 172 for as the SRS and anti-lock brake
additional information). system.
Before Driving 171

０３／０９／０３１１：５３：２８３１ＳＤＡ６１００１７５
▼
Modifications
Modifying Your Vehicle Larger or smaller wheels and tires hurt someone.
Removing parts from your vehicle, can interfere with the operation of
or replacing components with non- your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and On models equipped with side airbags or
Honda (aftermarket) components other systems. side curtain airbags
could seriously affect your vehicle’s Do not attach hard objects on or
handling, stability, and reliability. Do not modify your steering wheel near a front door. If a side airbag
or any other part of your or a side curtain airbag inflates, a
Some examples are: Supplemental Restraint System. cup holder or other hard object
Lowering the vehicle with an Modifications could make the attached on or near the door could
aftermarket suspension kit that system ineffective. See the safety be propelled inside the vehicle and
significantly reduces ground precautions on page 6 . hurt someone.
clearance can allow the
undercarriage to hit speed bumps If you plan to modify your vehicle, Do not place any objects over or
or other raised objects, which consult your Honda dealer. replace the outside edge of a front
could cause the airbags to deploy. seat-back. This could prevent the
Additional Safety Precautions airbag from inflating properly.
Raising your vehicle with an Do not attach or place objects on
aftermarket suspension kit can the front airbag covers. Any object
affect the handling and stability. attached to or placed on the covers
marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’ in the
Aftermarket wheels, because they center of the steering wheel and
are a universal design, can cause on top of the dashboard, could
excessive stress on suspension interfere with the proper operation
components. of the airbags. Or, if the airbags
inflate, the objects could be
propelled inside the vehicle and
172 Before Driving

０３／０９／０３１１：５３：３９３１ＳＤＡ６１００１７６
▼
Carrying Cargo
Your vehicle has several convenient

DOOR POCKET storage areas:
CENTER POCKET
Glove box
Door and seat-back pockets
Trunk, including the back seats

when folded down
Center pocket
Console compartment (on some

models)
Roof-rack (if installed)
However, carrying too much cargo,

or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicle’s handling, stability,
stopping distance, and tires, and
CONSOLE make it unsafe. Before carrying any
COMPARTMENT type of cargo, be sure to read the
following pages.
TRUNK SEAT-BACK POCKET GLOVE BOX
CONTINUED
Before Driving 173

０３／０９／０３１１：５３：５０３１ＳＤＡ６１００１７７
▼
Carrying Cargo
To determine the correct cargo and For example, if there will be four 150
luggage load limit: lbs (70 kg) occupants in your vehicle,
Overloading or improper the amount of available cargo and
loading can affect handling and 1. Locate the statement, ‘‘the luggage load capacity is 250 lbs (115
stability and cause a crash in combined weight of occupants and kg).
which you can be hurt or killed. cargo should never exceed 850 lbs 4 × 150 lbs (70 kg) = 600 lbs (280
(395 kg)’’ on your vehicle’s placard kg)
Follow all load limits and other (on the driver’s doorjamb). 850 lbs (395 kg) − 600 lbs (280 kg) =
loading guidelines in this 250 lbs (115 kg)
manual. 2. Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that 5. Determine the combined weight
will be riding in the vehicle. of accessories, luggage, and cargo
The maximum load for your vehicle (Five is seating capacity of your being loaded in the vehicle. The
is 850 lbs (395 kg). This figure vehicle.) weight may not safely exceed the
includes the total weight of all available cargo and luggage load
occupants, cargo, accessories, and 3. Subtract the combined weight of capacity calculated in step 4 [250
the tongue weight if you are towing a the driver and passengers from lbs (115 kg) in this example].
trailer. 850 lbs (395 kg).
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
4. The resulting figure equals the trailer, the load from your trailer
available amount of cargo and will be transferred to your vehicle.
luggage load capacity. Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
174 Before Driving

０３／０９／０３１１：５４：０１３１ＳＤＡ６１００１７８
▼
Carrying Cargo
The total weight must not exceed If you carry large items that Carrying Items in the Passenger
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating prevent you from closing the trunk Compartment
(GVWR). The load for the front and lid, exhaust gas can enter the Store or secure all items that could
rear axles also must not exceed the passenger area. To avoid the be thrown around and hurt
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) possibility of carbon monoxide someone during a crash.
(see page 195 ). poisoning, follow the instructions
on page 56 . Be sure items placed on the floor
Carrying Cargo in the Trunk behind the front seats cannot roll
Distribute cargo evenly on the If you carry any items on a roof under the seats and interfere with
floor of the trunk, placing the rack, be sure the total weight of the pedals or seat operation.
heaviest items on the bottom and the rack and the items does not
as far forward as possible. exceed 165 lbs (75 kg). Keep the glove box closed while
driving. If it is open, a passenger
If you fold down the back seat, tie If you use an accessory roof rack, could injure their knees during a
down items that could be thrown the roof rack weight limit may be crash or sudden stop.
about the vehicle during a crash or lower. Refer to the information that
sudden stop. came with your roof rack.
Before Driving 175

０３／０９／０３１１：５４：０９３１ＳＤＡ６１００１８０
▼
Main Menu
Driving
This section gives you tips on Preparing to Drive ......................... 178

starting the engine under various Starting the Engine........................ 179
conditions, and how to operate the 5-speed Manual Transmission ..... 180
5-speed manual and automatic Recommended Shift Points ...... 181
transmissions. It also includes Engine Speed Limiter ............... 181
important information on parking Automatic Transmission............... 182
your vehicle, the braking system, the Shift Lever Position
Traction Control System, and facts Indicators ................................ 182
you need if you are planning to tow a Shifting ........................................ 182
trailer. Engine Speed Limiter ............... 184
Shift Lock Release ..................... 185
Parking ............................................ 187
Braking System.............................. 188
Brake System Design................ 188
Brake Wear Indicators .............. 188
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) ............ 189
Activating the Anti-lock
Brakes ................................. 189
ABS Indicator ......................... 189
Traction Control System............... 191
TCS ON/OFF Switch................ 192
TCS Activation Indicator .......... 192
Towing a Trailer ............................ 194
Driving 177
０３／０９／０３１１：５４：２２３１ＳＤＡ６１００１８１
▼
Preparing to Drive
You should do the following checks 4. Check the seat adjustment (see 9. When you start the engine, check
and adjustments before you drive pages 92 and 93 ). the gauges and indicator lights in
your vehicle. the instrument panel (see page
5. Check the adjustment of the 61 ).
1. Make sure all windows, mirrors, inside and outside mirrors (see
and outside lights are clean and page 98 ).
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
or ice. 6. Check the steering wheel
adjustment (see page 78 ).
2. Visually check the tires. If a tire
looks low, use a gauge to check its 7. Make sure the doors are securely
pressure. closed and locked.
3. Check that any items you may be 8. Fasten your seat belt. Check that
carrying are stored properly or your passengers have fastened
fastened down securely. their seat belts (see page 15 ).
178 Driving
０３／０９／０３１１：５４：３３３１ＳＤＡ６１００１８２
▼
Starting the Engine
1. Apply the parking brake. 4. Turn the ignition key to the 6. If the engine fails to start, press
START (III) position. Do not hold the accelerator pedal all the way
2. In cold weather, turn off all the key in START (III) for more down and hold it there while
electrical accessories to reduce than 15 seconds at a time. If the starting to clear flooding. Return
the drain on the battery. engine does not start right away, to step 5 if the engine does not
pause for at least 10 seconds start.
3. Manual Transmission: before trying again.
Push the clutch pedal down all the NOTICE: The engine is harder to start
way. 5. If the engine does not start within in cold weather. Also, the thinner air
15 seconds, or starts but stalls f ound at altitudes above 8,000 f eet
Automatic Transmission: right away, repeat step 4 with the (2,400 meters) adds to this problem.
Make sure the shift lever is in accelerator pedal pressed halfway
Park. Press on the brake pedal. down. If the engine starts, release
pressure on the accelerator pedal
so the engine does not race.
Driving 179
０３／０９／０３１１：５４：４０３１ＳＤＡ６１００１８３
▼
5-speed Manual Transmission
Come to a full stop before you shift

into Reverse. You can damage the
transmission by trying to shift into Rapid slowing or speeding-up
Reverse with the vehicle moving. can cause loss of control on
Push down the clutch pedal, and slippery surfaces. If you crash,
pause for a few seconds before you can be injured.
shifting into Reverse, or shift into
one of the forward gears for a Use extra care when driving on
moment. This stops the gears so slippery surfaces.
they won’t ‘‘grind.’’
When slowing down, you can get

extra braking from the engine by
The manual transmission is syn- shifting to a lower gear. This extra
chronized in all forward gears for braking can help you maintain a safe
smooth operation. It has a lockout so speed and prevent your brakes from
you cannot shift directly from Fifth overheating while going down a
to Reverse. When shifting up or steep hill. Before downshifting,
down, make sure you push the clutch make sure engine speed will not go
pedal down all the way, shift to the into the tachometer’s red zone in the
next gear, and let the pedal up lower gear.
gradually. When you are not shifting,
do not rest your foot on the clutch
pedal. This can cause your clutch to
wear out faster.
180 Driving
０３／０９／０３１１：５４：４８３１ＳＤＡ６１００１８４
▼
5-speed Manual Transmission
Recommended Shift Points Engine Speed Limiter

Drive in the highest gear that lets If you exceed the maximum speed
the engine run and accelerate for the gear you are in, the engine
smoothly. This will give you the best speed will enter into the tachometer’s
fuel economy and effective emis- red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
sions control. The following shift the engine cut in and out. This is
points are recommended: caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
Shift up Normal acceleration run normally when you reduce the
RPM below the red zone.
1st to 2nd 15 mph (25 km/h)
2nd to 3rd 25 mph (40 km/h) Before downshifting, make sure the
3rd to 4th 40 mph (65 km/h) engine will not go into the
4th to 5th 50 mph (80 km/h) tachometer’s red zone.
Driving 181
０３／０９／０３１１：５４：５８３１ＳＤＡ６１００１８５
▼
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lever Position Indicators If the malfunction indicator lamp To shift from any position, press the
comes on along with the ‘‘D’’ release button on the side of the
indicator, there is a problem in the shift lever to move it. You cannot
automatic transmission control shift out of Park when the ignition
system. Avoid rapid acceleration and switch is in LOCK (0) or
have the transmission checked by a ACCESSORY (I).
Honda dealer as soon as possible.
To shift from: Do this:
Shifting P to R Press the brake pedal and
press the release button.
SHIFT LEVER R to P
N to R Press the release button.
D3 to 2
These indicators between the tacho- 2 to 1
meter and speedometer show which 1 to 2
position the shift lever is in. 2 to D3
D3 to D
The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a D to N Move the lever.
few seconds when you turn the D to D3
ignition switch to ON (II). If it N to D
flashes while driving (in any shift R to N
position), it indicates a possible
problem in the transmission.
182 Driving
０３／０９／０３１１：５５：０７３１ＳＤＡ６１００１８６
▼
Park (P) − This position mechani- Reverse (R) − Press the brake Drive (D3) −This position is similar
cally locks the transmission. Use pedal and press the release button to to D, except only the first three
Park whenever you are turning off or shift from Park to Reverse. To shift gears are selected instead of all five.
starting the engine. To shift out of from Reverse to Neutral, come to a Use D3 when towing a trailer in hilly
Park, you must press on the brake complete stop and then shift. terrain, or to provide engine braking
pedal and have your foot off the when going down a steep hill. D3 can
accelerator pedal. Press the release Neutral (N) − Use Neutral if you also keep the transmission from
button on the side of the shift lever need to restart a stalled engine, or if cycling between third and fourth
to move it. it is necessary to stop briefly with gears in stop-and-go driving.
the engine idling. Shift to the Park
If you have done all of the above and position if you need to leave your
still cannot move the lever out of vehicle for any reason. Press on the
Park, see Shift Lock Release on brake pedal when you are moving
page 185 . the shift lever from Neutral to
another gear.
You must also press the release
button to shift into Park. To avoid Drive (D) − Use this position for
transmission damage, come to a your normal driving. The
complete stop before shifting into transmission automatically selects a
Park. The shift lever must be in Park suitable gear for the vehicle speed
before you can remove the key from and acceleration. You may notice the
the ignition switch. transmission shifting up at higher
speeds when the engine is cold. This
helps the engine warm up faster.
CONTINUED
Driving 183
０３／０９／０３１１：５５：１７３１ＳＤＡ６１００１８７
▼
Second (2) − This position locks First (1) − To shift from Second to Engine Speed Limiter
the transmission in second gear. It First, press the release button on the If you exceed the maximum speed
does not downshift to first gear side of the shift lever. With the lever for the gear you are in, the engine
when you come to a stop. in this position, the transmission speed will enter into the tachometer’s
locks in First gear. By upshifting and red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
Use Second gear: downshifting through 1, 2, D3, and D, the engine cut in and out. This is
you can operate this transmission caused by a limiter in the engine’s
For more power when climbing. much like a manual transmission computer controls. The engine will
without a clutch pedal. run normally when you reduce the
To increase engine braking when RPM below the red zone.
going down steep hills.
For starting out on a slippery

surface or in deep snow.
To help reduce wheel spin.
When driving downhill with a

trailer.
184 Driving
０３／０９／０３１１：５５：２７３１ＳＤＡ６１００１８８
▼
Shift Lock Release COVER 4. Insert the key in the Shift Lock
This allows you to move the shift Release slot.
lever out of Park if the normal
method of pushing on the brake
pedal and pressing the release
button does not work.
1. Set the Parking brake.
2. Remove the key from the ignition

switch.
3. Put a cloth on the edge of the Shift

Lock Release slot cover next to
the shift lever. Use a small flat-
tipped screwdriver or finger nail
file to remove the cover. Carefully
pry off the edge of the cover.
CONTINUED
Driving 185
０３／０９／０３１１：５５：３４３１ＳＤＡ６１００１８９
▼
If you need to use the Shift Lock

RELEASE Release, it means your vehicle is
BUTTON
developing a problem. Have the
vehicle checked by a Honda dealer.
SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT
5. Push down on the key while you

press the release button on the
shift lever and move the shift lever
out of Park to Neutral.
6. Remove the key from the Shift

Lock Release slot, then reinstall
the cover. Make sure the notch on
the cover is on the left side.
Depress the brake pedal and
restart the engine.
186 Driving
０３／０９／０３１１：５５：４６３１ＳＤＡ６１００１９０
▼
Parking
Always use the parking brake when Parking Tips If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
you park your vehicle. Make sure Make sure the moonroof (if the front wheels away from the
the parking brake is set firmly or equipped) and the windows are curb. If your vehicle has a manual
your vehicle may roll if it is parked closed. transmission, put it in first gear.
on an incline.
Turn off the lights. If the vehicle is facing downhill,
If your vehicle has an automatic turn the front wheels toward the
transmission, set the parking brake Place any packages, valuables, etc., curb. If your vehicle has a manual
before you put the transmission in in the trunk or take them with you. transmission, put it in reverse gear.
Park. This keeps the vehicle from
moving and putting pressure on the Lock the doors with the key or the Make sure the parking brake is
parking mechanism in the remote transmitter. fully released before driving away.
transmission. On EX, LX-V6, and Canadian LX-G Driving with the parking brake
models partially set can overheat or
If your vehicle has a manual Check the indicator on the damage the rear brakes.
transmission, put it in first gear. instrument panel to verify that the
security system is set.
Never park over dry leaves, tall

grass, or other flammable
materials. The hot three way
catalytic converter could cause
these materials to catch on fire.
Driving 187
０３／０９／０３１１：５５：５６３１ＳＤＡ６１００１９１
▼
Braking System
Your Honda is equipped with disc Check the brakes after driving The hydraulic system that operates
brakes. The brakes on the rear through deep water. Apply the the brakes has two separate circuits.
wheels may be disc or drum, brakes moderately to see if they feel Each circuit works diagonally across
depending on the model. A power normal. If not, apply them gently and the vehicle (the left-front brake is
assist helps reduce the effort needed frequently until they do. Be extra connected with the right-rear brake,
on the brake pedal. The ABS helps cautious in your driving. etc.). If one circuit should develop a
you retain steering control when problem, you will still have braking
braking very hard. Braking System Design at two wheels.
Resting your foot on the pedal keeps Brake Wear Indicators

the brakes applied lightly, builds up If the brake pads need replacing, you
heat, and reduces their effectiveness. will hear a distinctive, metallic
It also keeps your brake lights on all screeching sound when you apply
the time, confusing drivers behind Front the brake pedal. If you do not have
you. the brake pads replaced, they will
screech all the time. It is normal for
Constant application of the brakes the brakes to occasionally squeal or
when going down a long hill builds squeak when you apply them.
up heat and reduces their effective-
ness. Use the engine to assist the
brakes by taking your foot off the
accelerator and downshifting to a
lower gear.
188 Driving
０３／０９／０３１１：５６：０６３１ＳＤＡ６１００１９２
▼
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) Activating the Anti-lock Brakes ABS Indicator

The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) You will feel a pulsation in the brake If the ABS indicator comes on, the
helps prevent the brakes from pedal when the ABS activates, and anti-lock function of the braking
locking up and helps you retain you may hear some noise. This is system has shut down. The brakes
steering control by pumping the normal: it is the ABS rapidly still work like a conventional system,
brakes rapidly, much faster than a pumping the brakes. On dry but without anti-lock. You should
person can do it. pavement, you will need to press on have the dealer inspect your vehicle
the brake pedal very hard before the as soon as possible.
The ABS also balances the front-to- ABS activates. However, you may
rear braking distribution according feel the ABS activate immediately if If the ABS indicator and the brake
to vehicle loading. you are trying to stop on snow or ice. system indicator come on together
and the parking brake is fully
You should never pump the brake pedal; released, the front-to-rear braking
this defeats the purpose of the ABS. distribution system may also be shut
Let the ABS work for you by always down.
keeping firm, steady pressure on the
brake pedal as you steer away from
the hazard. This is sometimes
referred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’
CONTINUED
Driving 189
０３／０９／０３１１：５６：１８３１ＳＤＡ６１００１９３
▼
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
steering control during braking. If the ABS indicator and the brake
ABS INDICATOR system indicator come on together
ABS will not prevent a skid that and the parking brake is fully
results from changing direction released, the front-to-rear braking
abruptly, such as trying to take a distribution system may also be shut
corner too fast or making a sudden down.
lane change. Always drive at a safe
speed for the road and weather Test your brakes as instructed on
conditions. page 262 . If the brakes feel normal,
drive slowly and have your vehicle
ABS cannot prevent a loss of repaired by your Honda dealer as
stability. Always steer moderately soon as possible. Avoid sudden hard
when you are braking hard. Severe braking which could cause the rear
Test your brakes as instructed on or sharp steering wheel movement wheels to lock up and possibly lead
page 262 . If the brakes feel normal, can still cause your vehicle to veer to a loss of control.
drive slowly and have your vehicle into oncoming traffic or off the road.
repaired by your Honda dealer as On all V6 models
soon as possible. Avoid sudden hard A vehicle with ABS may require a The TCS indicator will come on
braking which could cause the rear longer distance to stop on loose or along with the ABS indicator.
wheels to lock up and possibly lead uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
to a loss of control. snow, than a vehicle without anti-
lock. Slow down and allow a greater
Important Safety Reminders distance between vehicles under
ABS does not reduce the time or those conditions.
distance it takes to stop the
vehicle. It only helps with the
190 Driving
０３／０９／０３１１：５６：２７３１ＳＤＡ６１００１９４
▼
Traction Control System
On LX-V6 and EX-V6 models The TCS indicator (see page 64 )

TCS ACTIVATION INDICATOR
Your Honda is equipped with a and the TCS Activation indicator
Traction Control System (TCS) to come on and stay on when there is a
assist you in maintaining traction problem with the TCS.
while driving slowly on loose or
slippery surfaces. You should still install winter tires on
your vehicle during the winter. Make
TCS monitors the speed of all four sure to use the same size originally
wheels. When it senses a front wheel supplied with the vehicle. Exercise
losing traction, it applies braking to the same caution in winter driving as
that wheel. The TCS Activation you would if your vehicle was not
indicator flashes when this occurs. TCS INDICATOR equipped with TCS.
Driving with TCS requires no special When starting out or driving on a Driving with the compact spare tire
skills or technique. The TCS does loose or slippery road surface, you installed (see page 248 ) may
not control your vehicle’s whole may notice that the vehicle does not activate the TCS. You should turn off
braking system and cannot prevent respond to the accelerator in the the system.
skidding if you enter a corner too same way it does at other times. This
fast. It is still your responsibility to is a sign TCS is activating. You will
drive at reasonable speeds and to see the TCS Activation indicator
leave a sufficient margin of safety. light flash.
Driving 191
０３／０９／０３１１：５６：４０３１ＳＤＡ６１００１９５
▼
TCS ON/OFF Switch Deactivate the system by pressing TCS Activation Indicator
the TCS On/Off switch. The TCS The TCS indicator comes on or
Activation indicator comes on as a flashes under the following condi-
reminder. Pressing the switch again tions:
turns the system back on.
When you turn the ignition switch
The Traction Control System turns to ON (II).
on every time you start the engine,
even if you turned it off the last time When you manually turn off TCS.
you drove the vehicle.
It flashes when TCS is regulating
wheelspin.
If the system’s diagnostics senses

This switch is under the side vent. It a problem with TCS, the indicator
lets you turn the Traction Control will come on and stay on along
System on and off. You cannot turn with the TCS indicator.
off the TCS while the TCS Activation
light is flashing.
192 Driving
０３／０９／０３１１：５６：４７３１ＳＤＡ６１００１９６
▼
If the TCS indicator comes on while This indicator will come on along
driving, pull to the side of the road with the ABS indicator if there is a
when it is safe and turn off the problem in the anti-lock brake
engine. Reset the system by re- system (see ABS Indicator on page
starting the engine, and watch the 189 ).
TCS indicator. If the indicator
remains on, or comes back on while If the TCS indicator comes on along
driving, have the TCS inspected by with the Brake System indicator, it
your Honda dealer. You can still indicates a problem in the brake
drive the vehicle without TCS. system (see Brake System
Indicator on page 62 ).
The TCS indicator may occasionally
come on for one or two seconds and
then go out. This is normal.
Driving 193
０３／０９／０３１１：５６：５６３１ＳＤＡ６１００１９７
▼
Towing a Trailer
To safely tow a trailer, you should Load Limits

observe the load limits, use the
proper equipment, and follow the
guidelines in this section.
Exceeding any load limit or

improperly loading your vehicle
and trailer can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt
or killed.
Check the loading of your

vehicle and trailer carefully Total Trailer Weight: The total Tongue Load: The weight that
before starting to drive. weight of the trailer and the tongue of a fully-loaded trailer
everything loaded in it must not puts on the hitch should be
exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg). Towing approximately 10 percent of the
a load that is too heavy can trailer weight. Too little tongue
seriously affect your vehicle’s load can make the trailer unstable
handling and performance. It can and cause it to sway. Too much
also damage the engine and tongue load reduces front-tire
drivetrain. traction and steering control.
194 Driving
０３／０９／０３１１：５７：１０３１ＳＤＡ６１００１９８
▼
Towing a Trailer
To achieve a proper tongue load, Gross Axle Weight Rating Checking Loads
start by loading 60 percent of the (GAWR): The best way to confirm that vehicle
load toward the front of the trailer The total weight of the vehicle, all and trailer weights are within limits
and 40 percent toward the rear, then occupants, all cargo, and the is to have them checked at public
re-adjust the load as needed. tongue load must not exceed: scale.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 4-cylinder models: Using a suitable scale or a special
(GVWR): (DX, LX) tongue load gauge, check the tongue
The total weight of the vehicle, all 2,195 Ibs (995 kg) load the first time you set up a
occupants, all cargo, and the on the front axle towing combination (a fully-loaded
tongue load must not exceed: 1,960 Ibs (890 kg) vehicle and trailer), then recheck the
on the rear axle tongue load whenever the conditions
4-cylinder models: (EX, EX-L) change.
(DX, LX) 2,225 Ibs (1,010 kg)
4,080 Ibs (1,850 kg) on the front axle Safety Chains
(EX, EX-L) 1,985 Ibs (900 kg) Always use safety chains. Make sure
4,125 Ibs (1,870 kg) on the rear axle they are secured to both the trailer
and hitch, and that they cross under
6-cylinder models: 6-cylinder models: the tongue so they can catch the
4,300 Ibs (1,950 kg) 2,360 Ibs (1,070 kg) trailer if it becomes unhitched.
on the front axle Leave enough slack to allow the
2,005 Ibs (910 kg) trailer to turn corners easily, but do
on the rear axle not let chains drag on the ground.
Driving 195
０３／０９／０３１１：５７：２４３１ＳＤＡ６１００１９９
▼
Towing a Trailer
Towing Equipment and Trailer Brakes only equipment designed for your
Accessories Honda recommends that any trailer vehicle.
Towing can require a variety of having a total weight of 1,000 lbs
equipment, depending on the size of (450 kg) or more be equipped with Since lighting and wiring vary by
your trailer, how it will be used, and its own electric or surge-type brakes. trailer type and brand, you should
how much load you are towing. have a qualified technician install a
If you choose electric brakes, be suitable connector between the
Discuss your needs with your trailer sure they are electrically actuated. vehicle and the trailer. Improper
sales or rental agency, and follow the Do not attempt to tap into your equipment or installation can cause
guidelines in the rest of this section. vehicle’s hydraulic system. No damage to your vehicle’s electrical
Also make sure that all equipment is matter how successful it may seem, system and affect your vehicle
properly installed and that it meets any attempt to attach trailer brakes warranty.
federal, state, province, and local to your vehicle’s hydraulic system
regulations. will lower braking effectiveness and Additional Trailer Equipment
create a potential hazard. Many states and Canadian provinces
Hitches require special outside mirrors when
Any hitch used on your vehicle must See your trailer dealer for more towing a trailer. Even if they don’t,
be properly bolted to the underbody. information on installing electric you should install special mirrors if
brakes. you cannot clearly see behind you, or
if the trailer creates a blind spot.
Trailer Lights
Trailer lights and equipment must Ask your trailer sales or rental
comply with federal, state, and local agency if any other items are
regulations. Check with your local recommended or required for your
recreational vehicle dealer for the towing situation.
requirements in your area, and use
196 Driving
０３／０９／０３１１：５７：３７３１ＳＤＡ６１００２００
▼
Towing a Trailer
Pre-Tow Checklist Your vehicle tires and spare are Backing Up

When preparing to tow, and before properly inflated (see page 238 ), Always drive slowly and have
driving away, be sure to check the and the trailer tires and spare are someone guide you when backing up.
following: trailer maker. Grip the bottom of the steering
wheel; then turn the wheel to the left
The vehicle has been properly Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting to get the trailer to move to the left,
serviced, and the tires, brakes, Crosswinds and air turbulence and turn the wheel right to move the
suspension, and cooling system caused by passing trucks can disrupt trailer to the right.
are in good operating condition. your steering and cause trailer
swaying. When being passed by a Parking
All weights and loads are within large vehicle, keep a constant speed Follow all normal precautions when
limits (see pages 194 and 195 ). and steer straight ahead. Do not try parking, including firmly setting the
to make quick steering or braking parking brake and putting the
The hitch, safety chains, and any corrections. transmission in Park (automatic) or
other attachments are secure. in 1st or Reverse (manual). Also,
place wheel chocks at each of the
All items on and in the trailer are trailer’s tires.
properly secured and cannot shift
while you drive.
The lights and brakes on your

vehicle and the trailer are working
properly.
Driving 197
０３／０９／０３１１：５７：５０３１ＳＤＡ６１００２０１
▼
Towing a Trailer
Driving Safely With a Trailer Making Turns and Braking If you must stop when facing uphill,
The added weight, length, and Make turns more slowly and wider use the foot brake or parking brake.
height of a trailer will affect your than normal. The trailer tracks a Do not try to hold the vehicle in
vehicle’s handling and performance, smaller arc than your vehicle, and it place by pressing on the accelerator,
so driving with a trailer requires can hit or run over something the as this can cause the automatic
some special driving skills and vehicle misses. Allow more time and transmission to overheat.
techniques. distance for braking. Do not brake or
turn suddenly as this could cause the When driving down hills, reduce
For your safety and the safety of trailer to jackknife or turn over. your speed and shift down to 2nd
others, take time to practice driving gear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, and
maneuvers before heading for the Driving on Hills remember it will take longer to slow
open road, and follow the guidelines When climbing hills, closely watch down and stop when towing a trailer.
below. your temperature gauge. If it nears
the red (Hot) mark, turn the air
Towing Speeds and Gears conditioning off, reduce speed and, if
Drive slower than normal in all necessary, pull to the side of the
driving situations, and obey posted road to let the engine cool.
speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
If you have an automatic If the automatic transmission shifts
transmission, use D position when frequently while going up a hill, shift
towing a trailer on level roads. D3 is to D3.
the proper shift lever position to use
when towing a trailer in hilly terrain.
(See ‘‘Driving on Hills’’ in the next
column for additional gear
information.)
198 Driving
０３／０９／０３１１：５７：５７３１ＳＤＡ６１００２０２
▼
Main Menu
Maintenance
This section explains why it is Maintenance Safety ....................... 200 Timing Belt ..................................... 227
important to keep your vehicle well Maintenance Schedule .................. 201 Hood Latch ..................................... 227
maintained and how to follow basic Servicing Your Vehicle ............. 202 Lights .............................................. 228
maintenance safety precautions. Owner’s Maintenance Replacing Bulbs ......................... 228
Checks .................................... 203 Seat Belt .......................................... 235
This section also includes 4-cylinder Models ...................... 204 Floor Mats ...................................... 235
Maintenance Schedules for normal 6-cylinder Models ...................... 206 Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 235
driving and severe driving conditions, Maintenance Record ..................... 208 Wiper Blades .................................. 236
a Maintenance Record, and instruc- Fluid Locations............................... 212 Tires ................................................ 238
tions for simple maintenance tasks Adding Engine Oil ......................... 214 Inflation ....................................... 238
you may want to take care of Recommended Engine Oil........ 214 Tire Inspection ........................... 240
yourself. Synthetic Oil ............................... 215 Tire Maintenance ...................... 240
Engine Oil Additives ................. 215 Tire Rotation .............................. 241
If you have the skills and tools to per- Changing the Oil and Filter .......... 216 Replacing Tires .......................... 241
form more complex maintenance Windshield Washers ..................... 218 Wheels and Tires ....................... 242
tasks on your Honda, you may want Engine Coolant ............................... 219 Winter Driving ........................... 242
to purchase the Service Manual. See Adding Engine Coolant ............. 219 Snow Tires .............................. 242
page 291 for information on how to Transmission Fluid ........................ 221 Tire Chains ............................. 243
obtain a copy, or see your Honda Automatic Checking Your Battery ................. 244
dealer. Transmission.......................... 221 Vehicle Storage .............................. 246
5-speed Manual
Transmission.......................... 224
Brake and Clutch Fluid ................. 225
Brake Fluid ................................. 225
Clutch Fluid ................................ 226
Power Steering Fluid ..................... 226
Maintenance 199
０３／０９／０３１１：５８：０９３１ＳＤＡ６１００２０３
▼
Maintenance Safety
All service items not detailed in this

section should be performed by a
Honda technician or other qualified Improperly maintaining this Failure to properly follow
mechanic. vehicle or failing to correct a maintenance instructions and
problem before driving can precautions can cause you to
Important Safety Precautions cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
To eliminate potential hazards, read be seriously hurt or killed.
the instructions before you begin, Always follow the procedures
and make sure you have the tools Always follow the inspection, and precautions in this owner’s
and skills required. maintenance recommendations, manual.
Make sure your vehicle is parked and schedules in this owner’s
on level ground, the parking brake manual.
is set, and the engine is off. Some of the most important safety
To clean parts, use a commercially precautions are given here. However,
available degreaser or parts Potential Vehicle Hazards we cannot warn you of every
cleaner, not gasoline. Carbon Monoxide poison conceivable hazard that can arise in
To reduce the possibility of fire or from engine exhaust. Be sure performing maintenance. Only you
explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, there is adequate ventilation can decide whether or not you
and flames away from the battery whenever you operate the should perform a given task.
and all fuel-related parts. engine.
Wear eye protection and Burns from hot parts. Let the
protective clothing when engine and exhaust system cool
working near the battery or before touching any parts.
when using compressed air. Injury from moving parts. Do
not run the engine unless
instructed to do so.
200 Maintenance
０３／０９／０３１１：５８：２４３１ＳＤＡ６１００２０４
▼
Maintenance Schedule
The maintenance schedule assumes Which Schedule to Follow Trailer towing, driving with a roof
you will use your vehicle as normal Service your vehicle according to the top carrier, or driving in
transportation for passengers and time and mileage periods on one of mountainous conditions.
their possessions. You should also the Maintenance Schedules on the
follow these recommendations: following pages. Driving on muddy, dusty, or de-
iced roads.
Avoid exceeding your vehicle’s U.S. Owners − Follow the
load limit. This puts excess stress Maintenance Schedule for Severe NOTE: If you only OCCASIONALLY
on the engine, brakes, and many Conditions if you drive your vehicle drive under a ‘‘severe’’ condition, you
other vehicle parts. The load limit MAINLY under one or more of the should follow the Normal Conditions
is shown on the tire information following conditions. Maintenance Schedule.
label on the driver’s doorjamb.
Driving less than 5 miles (8 km) Canadian Owners − Follow the
Operate your vehicle on per trip or, in freezing Maintenance Schedule for Severe
reasonable roads within the legal temperatures, driving less than 10 Conditions.
speed limit. miles (16 km) per trip.
Drive your vehicle regularly over a Driving in extremely hot [over

distance of several miles 90°F (32°C)] conditions.
(kilometers).
Used primarily as a delivery
Always use unleaded gasoline with vehicle or taxi that is driven
the proper octane rating (see page mostly in stop-and-go traffic and/
164 ). or parked with the engine idling.
Maintenance 201
０３／０９／０３１１：５８：３１３１ＳＤＡ６１００２０５
▼
Servicing Your Vehicle We recommend the use of Honda According to state and federal
Your authorized Honda dealer parts and fluids whenever you have regulations, failure to perform
knows your vehicle best and can maintenance done. maintenance on the items marked
provide competent, efficient service. with ＃ will not void your emissions
However, service at a dealer is not U.S. Vehicles: Maintenance, warranties. However, Honda
mandatory to keep your warranties replacement, or repair of emissions recommends that all maintenance
in effect. Maintenance may be done control devices and systems may be services be performed at the
by any qualified service facility or done by any automotive repair recommended time or mileage
skilled person to keep your establishment or individual using period to ensure long-term reliability.
warranties in effect. Keep all the parts that are ‘‘certified’’ to EPA
receipts as proof of completion, and standards.
have the person who does the work
fill out the Maintenance Record.
Check your warranty booklet for
more information.
202 Maintenance
０３／０９／０３１１：５８：４０３１ＳＤＡ６１００２０６
▼
Owner’s Maintenance Checks Brakes − Check the fluid level

You should check the following monthly. See page 225 .
items at the specified intervals. If
you are unsure of how to perform Tires − Check the tire pressure
any check, turn to the appropriate monthly. Examine the tread for
page listed. wear and foreign objects. See page
238 .
Engine oil level − Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See Lights − Check the operation of
page 168 . the headlights, parking lights,
taillights, high-mount brake light,
Engine coolant level − Check the and license plate lights monthly.
radiator reserve tank every time
you fill the fuel tank. See page 169 .
Automatic transmission − Check

the fluid level monthly. See pages
221 − 224 .
Maintenance 203
０３／０９／０３１１：５９：０２３１ＳＤＡ６１００２０７
▼
4-cylinder Models
Service the items listed at the indicated distance (or time, if given).
miles x 1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
km x 1,000 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240
Check engine oil and coolant Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop
Check tires Check inflation and condition once a month
Replace engine oil Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or every 1 year, whichever comes first
Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 241 ) Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km)
Maintenance Schedule for Normal Conditions
Replace engine oil filter

Check front and rear brake wear
Check parking brake adjustment
Inspect the following items:
Tie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots
Suspension components Every 20,000 miles (32,000 km) or every 1 year, whichever comes first
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system＃
Fuel lines and connections＃
Inspect drive belt Every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or every 2 years, whichever comes first
Replace dust and pollen filter
Replace air cleaner element
Replace spark plugs
Inspect valve clearance Inspect every 110,000 miles (176,000 km), otherwise adjust only if noisy
Replace automatic transmission fluid＊
Replace manual transmission fluid Every 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or every 6 years, whichever comes first
Inspect idle speed Every 160,000 miles (256,000 km)
Replace engine coolant 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years
Replace brake fluid Every 3 years (independent of mileage)
＃: See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page 202 .
＊: Replace at 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 6 years, then every 90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 5 years.
204 Maintenance
０３／０９／０３１１：５９：２８３１ＳＤＡ６１００２０８
▼
4-cylinder Models
miles x 1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
km x 1,000 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240
Replace engine oil Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or every 6 months, whichever comes first
Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions

Lubricate all hinges, locks and latches
Inspect the following items: Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or every 1 year, whichever comes first
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
All fluid levels and condition of fluids Every 20,000 miles (32,000 km) or every 1 year, whichever comes first
Exhaust system＃
Lights and controls/vehicle underbody
Replace dust and pollen filter＊1
Replace air cleaner element Every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) (Use normal schedule except in dusty conditions)
Replace spark plugs
Replace automatic transmission fluid＊2
Replace manual transmission fluid Every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or every 3 years, whichever comes first
Inspect idle speed Every 160,000 miles (256,000 km)
＊1: See dust and pollen filter on page 235 for replacement information under special driving conditions.
＊2: Replace at 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 3 years, then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2 years.
Maintenance 205
０３／０９／０３１１：５９：５０３１ＳＤＡ６１００２０９
▼
6-cylinder Models
miles x 1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150
km x 1,000 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192 216 240
Replace engine oil Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or every 1 year, whichever comes first
Maintenance Schedule for Normal Conditions

Suspension components Every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or every 1 year, whichever comes first
Driveshaft boots
Exhaust system＃
Replace dust and pollen filter
Replace air cleaner element
Replace spark plugs
Replace automatic transmission fluid＊
Inspect idle speed Inspect every 165,000 miles (264,000 km)
Replace timing belt and inspect water pump Every 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or every 7 years, whichever comes first
＊: Replace at 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 6 years, then every 90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 5 years.
206 Maintenance
０３／０９／０３１２：００：１３３１ＳＤＡ６１００２１０
▼
6-cylinder Models
miles x 1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150
km x 1,000 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192 216 240
Replace engine oil and oil filter Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or every 6 months, whichever comes first
Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions

Tie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or every 6 months, whichever comes first
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Lubricate all hinges, locks and latches
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS) Every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or every 1 year, whichever comes first
Exhaust system＃
Lights and controls/vehicle underbody
Replace dust and pollen filter＊1
Replace air cleaner element Every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) (Use normal schedule except in dusty conditions)
Replace spark plugs
Replace automatic transmission fluid＊2
Inspect idle speed Inspect every 165,000 miles (264,000 km)
Replace timing belt＃＊3, and inspect water pump Every 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or every 7 years, whichever comes first
＊1: See dust and pollen filter on page 235 for replacement information under special driving conditions.
＊2: Replace at 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 3 years, then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2 years.
＊3: See timing belt on page 223 for replacement information under special driving conditions.
Maintenance 207
０３／０９／０３１２：００：２２３１ＳＤＡ６１００２１１
▼
Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)
You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here, whether you follow the schedule for normal conditions (pages 204 , 206 ) or
severe conditions (pages 205 , 207 ). Keep the receipts for all work done on your vehicle.
3,750 mi Signature or dealer stamp mi/km 22,250 mi Signature or dealer stamp mi/km
6,000 km 36,000 km
Date Date
5,000 mi mi/km 25,000 mi mi/km

8,000 km 40,000 km
Date Date
7,500 mi mi/km 26,250 mi mi/km

12,000 km 42,000 km
Date Date
10,000 mi mi/km 30,000 mi mi/km

16,000 km 48,000 km
Date Date
11,250 mi mi/km 33,750 mi mi/km

18,000 km 54,000 km
Date Date
15,000 mi mi/km 35,000 mi mi/km

24,000 km 56,000 km
Date Date
18,750 mi mi/km 37,500 mi mi/km

30,000 km 60,000 km
Date Date
20,000 mi mi/km 40,000 mi mi/km

32,000 km 64,000 km
Date Date
208 Maintenance
０３／０９／０３１２：００：３０３１ＳＤＡ６１００２１２
▼
66,000 km 102,000 km
Date Date
45,000 mi mi/km 65,000 mi mi/km

72,000 km 104,000 km
Date Date
48,750 mi mi/km 67,500 mi mi/km

78,000 km 108,000 km
Date Date
50,000 mi mi/km 70,000 mi mi/km

80,000 km 112,000 km
Date Date
52,500 mi mi/km 71,250 mi mi/km

84,000 km 114,000 km
Date Date
55,000 mi mi/km 75,000 mi mi/km

88,000 km 120,000 km
Date Date
56,250 mi mi/km 78,750 mi mi/km

90,000 km 126,000 km
Date Date
60,000 mi mi/km 80,000 mi mi/km

96,000 km 128,000 km
Date Date
CONTINUED
Maintenance 209
０３／０９／０３１２：００：３８３１ＳＤＡ６１００２１３
▼
132,000 km 162,000 km
Date Date
85,000 mi mi/km 105,000 mi mi/km

136,000 km 168,000 km
Date Date
86,250 mi mi/km 108,750 mi mi/km

138,000 km 174,000 km
Date Date
90,000 mi mi/km 110,000 mi mi/km

144,000 km 176,000 km
Date Date
93,750 mi mi/km 112,500 mi mi/km

150,000 km 180,000 km
Date Date
95,000 mi mi/km 115,000 mi mi/km

152,000 km 184,000 km
Date Date
97,500 mi mi/km 116,250 mi mi/km

156,000 km 186,000 km
Date Date
100,000 mi mi/km 120,000 mi mi/km

166,000 km 192,000 km
Date Date
210 Maintenance
０３／０９／０３１２：００：４５３１ＳＤＡ６１００２１４
▼
198,000 km 228,000 km
Date Date
125,000 mi mi/km 145,000 mi mi/km

200,000 km 232,000 km
Date Date
127,500 mi mi/km 146,250 mi mi/km

204,000 km 234,000 km
Date Date
130,000 mi mi/km 150,000 mi mi/km

208,000 km 240,000 km
Date Date
131,250 mi mi/km
210,000 km
Date
135,000 mi mi/km
216,000 km
Date
138,750 mi mi/km
222,000 km
Date
140,000 mi mi/km
224,000 km
Date
Maintenance 211
０３／０９／０３１２：００：５１３１ＳＤＡ６１００２１５
▼
Fluid Locations
4-cylinder Models
BRAKE FLUID CLUTCH FLUID

(Gray cap) (5-speed Manual
Transmission only)
(Light gray cap)
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK ENGINE OIL

(Orange handle) FILL CAP
WASHER FLUID AUTOMATIC

(Blue cap) TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
POWER STEERING COOLANT

FLUID (Red cap) RESERVOIR
RADIATOR CAP
212 Maintenance
０３／０９／０３１２：００：５８３１ＳＤＡ６１００２１６
▼
Fluid Locations
6-cylinder Models
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK BRAKE FLUID
(Orange loop) (Gray cap)
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)
COOLANT
RESERVOIR
POWER STEERING
FLUID (Red cap) RADIATOR CAP
Maintenance 213
０３／０９／０３１２：０１：０６３１ＳＤＡ６１００２１７
▼
Adding Engine Oil
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

Recommended Engine Oil
Oil is a major contributor to your
engine’s performance and longevity.
Always use a premium-grade 5W-20
detergent oil displaying the API
Certification Seal. This seal indicates
the oil is energy conserving, and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models
Unscrew and remove the engine oil Install the engine oil fill cap and
fill cap on top of the valve cover. tighten it securely. Wait a few
Pour in the oil slowly and carefully so minutes and recheck the oil level. Do
you do not spill. Clean up any spills not fill above the upper mark; you
immediately. Spilled oil could could damage the engine.
damage components in the engine
compartment.
214 Maintenance
０３／０９／０３１２：０１：１６３１ＳＤＡ６１００２１８
▼
Adding Engine Oil
Honda Motor Oil is the preferred The oil viscosity or weight is Synthetic Oil
5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It is provided on the container’s label. You may use a synthetic motor oil if
highly recommended that you use 5W-20 oil is formulated for year- it meets the same requirements
Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for round protection of your Honda to given for a conventional motor oil: it
optimum engine protection. Make improve cold weather starting and displays the API Certification Seal
sure the API Certification Seal says fuel economy. and it is the proper weight. You must
‘‘For Gasoline Engines’’. follow the oil and filter change
intervals given on the maintenance
schedule.
Engine Oil Additives

Your Honda does not require any oil
additives. Additives may adversely
affect your engine’s or transmission’s
performance and durability.
Ambient Temperature
API CERTIFICATION SEAL
Maintenance 215
０３／０９／０３１２：０１：２６３１ＳＤＡ６１００２１９
▼
Changing the Oil and Filter
Always change the oil and filter WASHER OIL DRAIN BOLT OIL DRAIN BOLT WASHER
according to the recommendations in
the maintenance schedule. The oil
and filter collect contaminants that
can damage your engine if they are
not removed regularly.
Changing the oil and filter requires

special tools and access from
underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
should be raised on a service station-
type hydraulic lift for this service. 4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models
Unless you have the knowledge and
proper equipment, you should have 2. Open the hood and remove the 3. Remove the oil filter and let the
this maintenance done by a skilled engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil remaining oil drain. A special
mechanic. drain bolt and washer from the wrench (available from your
bottom of the engine. Drain the oil Honda dealer) is required.
1. Run the engine until it reaches into an appropriate container.
normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.
216 Maintenance
０３／０９／０３１２：０１：４１３１ＳＤＡ６１００２２０
▼
Changing the Oil and Filter
OIL FILTER OIL FILTER 7. Replace the engine oil fill cap.
Start the engine. The oil pressure
indicator should go out within 5
seconds. If it does not, turn off the
engine and check your work.
8. Let the engine run for several

minutes, then check the drain bolt
and oil filter for leaks.
9. Turn off the engine, let it sit for

4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models several minutes, then check the oil
level on the dipstick. If necessary,
4. Install a new oil filter according to 6. Refill the engine with the recom- add more oil.
the instructions that come with it. mended oil.
Make sure to clean off any dirt
and dust on the connecting Engine oil change capacity
surface of a new oil filter. (including filter): Improper disposal of engine oil can be
(4-cylinder models) harmf ul to the environment. If you
5. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, 4.4 US qt (4.2 ) change your own oil, please dispose of
then reinstall the drain bolt. (6-cylinder models) the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
Tighten it to: 4.5 US qt (4.3 ) container and take it to a recycling
(4-cylinder models) center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
33 lbf·ft (45 N·m , 4.6 kgf·m) or dump it on the ground.
(6-cylinder models)
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)
Maintenance 217
０３／０９／０３１２：０１：５２３１ＳＤＡ６１００２２１
▼
Windshield Washers
Check the level in the windshield LEVEL GAUGE LEVEL GAUGE

washer reservoir at least monthly
during normal use.
Check the reservoir’s fluid level by

removing the cap and looking at the
level gauge attached to the cap.
Canadian Models: The low washer

level indicator will light when the
level is low (see page 67 ).
4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
windshield washer fluid. This NOTICE: Do not use engine antif reeze
increases the cleaning capability and or a vinegar/water solution in the
prevents freezing in cold weather. windshield washer reservoir. Antif reeze
can damage your vehicle’s paint, while
When you refill the reservoir, clean a vinegar/water solution can damage
the edges of the windshield wiper the windshield washer pump. Use only
blades with windshield washer fluid commercially-available windshield
on a clean cloth. This will help to washer f luid.
condition the blade edges.
218 Maintenance
０３／０９／０３１２：０２：０２３１ＳＤＡ６１００２２２
▼
Engine Coolant
Adding Engine Coolant If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not

available, you may use another
major-brand non-silicate coolant as a
temporary replacement. Make sure it
is a high-quality coolant
recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda
coolant can result in corrosion,
causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling
system flushed and refilled with
Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
4-cylinder models RESERVE TANK 6-cylinder models RESERVE TANK possible.
If the reserve tank is completely
If the coolant level in the reserve empty, you should also check the
tank is at or below the MIN line, add coolant level in the radiator.
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line.
Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
Always use Honda All Season Removing the radiator cap
Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. This while the engine is hot can
coolant is pre-mixed with 50 percent cause the coolant to spray out,
antifreeze and 50 percent water. seriously scalding you.
Never add straight antifreeze or
plain water. Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
Maintenance 219
０３／０９／０３１２：０２：１２３１ＳＤＡ６１００２２３
▼
Engine Coolant
5. Pour coolant into the reserve tank.

Fill it to halfway between the MAX
RADIATOR CAP and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
Do not add any rust inhibitors or

other additives to your vehicle’s
cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
engine components.
4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models RADIATOR CAP
1. When the radiator and engine are 3. The coolant level should be up to
cool, relieve any pressure in the the base of the filler neck. Add
cooling system by turning the coolant if it is low.
radiator cap counterclockwise,
without pressing down. Pour the coolant slowly and
carefully so you do not spill. Clean
2. Remove the radiator cap by up any spill immediately; it could
pushing down and turning damage components in the engine
counterclockwise. compartment.
4. Put the radiator cap back on and

tighten it.
220 Maintenance
０３／０９／０３１２：０２：２５３１ＳＤＡ６１００２２４
▼
Transmission Fluid
Automatic Transmission marks.

4-cylinder models
5. If the level is below the lower
mark, add fluid into the tube to
bring it to the upper mark.
Always use Honda ATF-Z1

(Automatic Transmission Fluid). If
it’s not available, you may use a
DEXRON III automatic
transmission fluid as a temporary
UPPER MARK
replacement. However, continued
use can affect the shift quality. Have
LOWER MARK
DIPSTICK the transmission flushed and refilled
with Honda ATF-Z1 as soon as it is
Check the fluid level with the engine 3. Insert the dipstick all the way into convenient.
at normal operating temperature. the transmission.
1. Park the vehicle on level ground. Make sure the rubber cap on the
Shut off the engine. dipstick fits in the dipstick guide
and that you push the dipstick in
2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) all the way.
from the transmission, and wipe it
with a clean cloth. 4. Remove the dipstick and check
the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower CONTINUED
Maintenance 221
０３／０９／０３１２：０２：３６３１ＳＤＡ６１００２２５
▼
Transmission Fluid
To thoroughly flush the transmission, 6. Insert the dipstick all the way back Automatic Transmission
the technician should drain and refill into the transmission securely as 6-cylinder models
it with Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic shown in the illustration.
Transmission Fluid), then drive the
vehicle for a short distance. Do this The transmission should be drained
three times. Then drain and refill the and refilled with new fluid according
transmission a final time. to the time and distance recommen-
dations in the maintenance schedule.
If you are not sure how to add fluid,

contact your Honda dealer.
DIPSTICK
Check the fluid level with the engine

at normal operating temperature.
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.

Shut off the engine.
2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)

from the transmission, and wipe it
with a clean cloth.
222 Maintenance
０３／０９／０３１２：０２：４５３１ＳＤＡ６１００２２６
▼
Transmission Fluid
5. If the level is below the lower To thoroughly flush the transmission,

mark, add fluid into the tube to the technician should drain and refill
bring it to the upper mark. it with Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic
Transmission Fluid), then drive the
Always use Honda ATF-Z1 vehicle for a short distance. Do this
(Automatic Transmission Fluid). If three times. Then drain and refill the
it’s not available, you may use a transmission a final time.
DEXRON III automatic
transmission fluid as a temporary
replacement. However, continued
use can affect the shift quality. Have
the transmission flushed and refilled
UPPER MARK
with Honda ATF-Z1 as soon as it is
LOWER MARK convenient.
3. Insert the dipstick all the way into

the transmission.
Make sure the rubber cap fits in

the dipstick guide and the dipstick
is down all the way.
4. Remove the dipstick and check

the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks. CONTINUED
Maintenance 223
０３／０９／０３１２：０２：５５３１ＳＤＡ６１００２２７
▼
Transmission Fluid
6. Insert the dipstick all the way back 5-speed Manual Transmission If Honda MTF is not available, you
into the transmission. may use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40
FILLER BOLT viscosity motor oil with the API
The transmission should be drained Certification seal that says ‘‘FOR
and refilled with new fluid according GASOLINE ENGINES’’ as a
to the time and distance recommen- temporary replacement. However,
dations in the maintenance schedule. motor oil does not contain the proper
additives, and continued use can
If you are not sure how to add fluid, cause stiffer shifting. Replace as
contact your Honda dealer. soon as it is convenient.
The transmission should be drained

Correct level and refilled with new fluid according
to the time and distance recommen-
Check the fluid level with the dations in the maintenance schedule.
transmission at normal operating
temperature and the vehicle sitting
on level ground. Remove the
transmission filler bolt, and carefully
feel inside the bolt hole with your
finger. The fluid level should be up
to the edge of the bolt hole. If it is
not, add Honda Manual
Transmission Fluid (MTF) until it
starts to run out of the hole. Reinstall
the filler bolt, and tighten it securely.
224 Maintenance
０３／０９／０３１２：０３：０５３１ＳＤＡ６１００２２８
▼
Brake and Clutch Fluid
Check the fluid level in the Always use Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
reservoirs monthly. There are up to Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
two reservoirs, depending on the available, you should use only DOT 3 MAX
model. They are: or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
container, as a temporary
Brake fluid reservoir (all models) replacement.
Clutch fluid reservoir
(manual transmission only) Using any non-Honda brake fluid can
cause corrosion and decrease the life
Replace the brake fluid according to of the system. Have the brake
the recommendations in the system flushed and refilled with
maintenance schedule. Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 as soon as possible. MIN
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not The fluid level should be between
compatible with your vehicle’s the MIN and MAX marks on the side
braking system and can cause of the reservoir. If the level is at or
extensive damage. below the MIN mark, your brake
system needs attention. Have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
Maintenance 225
０３／０９／０３１２：０３：１６３１ＳＤＡ６１００２２９
▼
Brake and Clutch Fluid, Power Steering Fluid
Clutch Fluid Power Steering Fluid

MAX UPPER LEVEL UPPER LEVEL
MIN 4-cylinder models LOWER LEVEL 6-cylinder models LOWER LEVEL
The fluid level should be between Check the level on the side of the
the MIN and MAX marks on the side reservoir when the engine is cold.
of the reservoir. If it is not, add The fluid should be between the
brake fluid to bring it up to that level. UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.
Use the same fluid specified for the If not, add power steering fluid to the
brake system. UPPER LEVEL.
Low fluid level can indicate a leak in

the clutch system. Have this system
inspected as soon as possible.
226 Maintenance
０３／０９／０３１２：０３：２６３１ＳＤＡ６１００２３０
▼
Power Steering Fluid, Timing Belt
Always use Honda Power Steering Timing Belt Hood Latch

Fluid. You may use another power 6-cylinder models only
steering fluid as an emergency The timing belt should be replaced PIVOTS
replacement, but have the power at the intervals shown in the
steering system flushed and refilled maintenance schedule.
with Honda PSF as soon as possible.
Replace these belts at 60,000 miles
A low power steering fluid level can (U.S.) or 100,000 km (Canada) if you
indicate a leak in the system. Check regularly drive your vehicle in one or
the fluid level frequently, and have more of these conditions:
the system inspected as soon as
possible. In very high temperatures
(over 110°F, 43°C). LATCH ASSEMBLY
In very low temperatures
(under −20°F, −29°C). Clean the hood latch assembly with a
Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef t mild cleaner, then lubricate it with a
or right lock and holding it there can multipurpose grease. Lubricate all
damage the power steering pump. the moving parts (as shown),
including the pivot. Follow the time
and distance recommendations in
the Maintenance Schedule. If you
are not sure how to clean and grease
the latch, contact your Honda dealer.
Maintenance 227
０３／０９／０３１２：０３：３４３１ＳＤＡ６１００２３１
▼
Lights
Headlight Aiming Replacing a Headlight Bulb NOTE: Halogen headlight bulbs get
The headlights were properly aimed Your vehicle has two bulbs on each very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a
when your vehicle was new. If you side, four in total. Make sure you are scratch on the glass can cause the bulb
regularly carry heavy items in the replacing the bulb that is burned out. to overheat and shatter.
trunk or pull a trailer, readjustment Your vehicle uses halogen headlight
may be required. Adjustments bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
should be performed by a Honda it by its plastic case and protect the
technician or other qualified glass from contact with your skin or
mechanic. hard objects. If you touch the glass,
clean it with denatured alcohol and a
clean cloth.
228 Maintenance
０３／０９／０３１２：０３：４５３１ＳＤＡ６１００２３２
▼
Lights
High Beam Headlight
FASTENERS AIR INTAKE BULB

AIR INTAKE
COVER COVER
FASTENERS
4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models 4-cylinder models TAB
1. Open the hood. To change a bulb 2. Remove the electrical connector 3. Remove the bulb by turning it
on the passenger’s side, undo the from the bulb by squeezing the approximately one-quarter turn
two fasteners and remove the air connector to unlock the tab, then counterclockwise.
intake cover. slide the connector off the bulb.
4. Install the new bulb and turn it
one-quarter turn clockwise to lock
it in place.
CONTINUED
Maintenance 229
０３／０９／０３１２：０３：５９３１ＳＤＡ６１００２３３
▼
Lights
Low Beam Headlight
HOLDING CLIPS
BULB
TAB
6-cylinder models BULB
5. Push the electrical connector onto 1. To change the passenger’s side 3. Pull the inner fender cover away
the bulb. bulb, start the engine, turn the from the fender and bumper.
steering wheel all the way to the
6. Turn on the headlights to test the left, and turn off the engine. To 4. Remove the bulb by turning it
new bulb. change the driver’s side bulb, turn approximately one-quarter turn
the steering wheel to the right. counterclockwise.
7. (Passenger’s side)
Reinstall the air intake cover. 2. Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to 5. Remove the electrical connector
Reinstall the two fasteners and remove the two holding clips from from the bulb by squeezing the
secure them by pushing on the the inner fender. connector to unlock the tab, then
heads until they lock. slide the connector off the bulb.
230 Maintenance
０３／０９／０３１２：０４：１２３１ＳＤＡ６１００２３４
▼
Lights
6. Install the new bulb and turn it Replacing the Front Side Marker/
one-quarter turn clockwise to lock Turn Signal and Parking Light
it in place. Bulb
7. Push the electrical connector onto HOLDING CLIPS

the bulb.
8. Turn on the headlights to test the

new bulb.
9. Put the inner fender cover in place.

Install the two holding clips. Lock
each one in place by pushing on
the center.
BULB
1. To change the passenger’s side 3. Pull the inner fender cover away
bulb, start the engine, turn the from the fender and bumper.
steering wheel all the way to the
left, and turn off the engine. To 4. Remove the socket from the
change the driver’s side bulb, turn headlight assembly by turning it
the steering wheel to the right. one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
2. Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to

remove the two holding clips from
the inner fender. CONTINUED
Maintenance 231
０３／０９／０３１２：０４：２０３１ＳＤＡ６１００２３５
▼
Lights
5. To remove the burned out bulb,

push it in and turn it
counterclockwise until it unlocks.
6. Install the new bulb and turn it

clockwise to lock it in place.
7. Insert the socket into the

headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
8. Test the lights to make sure the

new bulb is working.
9. Put the inner fender cover in place.

Install and lock each holding clip
by pushing on the center.
232 Maintenance
０３／０９／０３１２：０４：３４３１ＳＤＡ６１００２３６
▼
Lights
Replacing Rear Bulbs 4. Push a new bulb straight into the Replacing Rear Bulbs
(in Fenders) socket until it bottoms, and (in Trunk Lid)
reinstall the socket into the light
BULBS assembly by turning it clockwise
until it locks.
5. Test the lights to make sure the

new bulb is working.
6. Reinstall the light assembly cover.
SOCKETS
COVER TRIM CLIPS
1. Open the trunk. 1. Open the trunk.
2. Remove the light assembly cover 2. 6-cylinder models

by pulling its outside edge. Remove the trim clips from the
right or left corner of the trunk lid
3. Remove the socket by turning it trim by carefully prying them
one-quarter turn counterclockwise using a small, flat-tip screwdriver
and pull the bulb straight out of its wrapped with tape.
socket.
CONTINUED
Maintenance 233
０３／０９／０３１２：０４：４７３１ＳＤＡ６１００２３７
▼
Lights
Replacing a High-mount Brake

Light Bulb
SOCKETS
BULBS
BULB
SOCKETS
BULBS SOCKET
3. Carefully bend back the corner of 5. Install a new bulb into the socket 1. Open the trunk and remove the
the trunk lid trim to expose the and reinstall the socket into the socket from the light assembly by
bulbs. light assembly. turning it one-quarter turn counter-
clockwise.
4. Remove the socket by turning it 6. Test the lights.
one-quarter turn counterclockwise 2. Remove the burned-out bulb by
and pull the bulb straight out of its 7. Push the trunk lid trim back into pulling it straight out of the socket.
socket. position.
3. Install the new bulb and reinstall
8. Press the trim clips back into their the socket.
holes.
234 Maintenance
０３／０９／０３１２：０５：００３１ＳＤＡ６１００２３８
▼
Seat Belts, Floor Mats, Dust and Pollen Filter
Seat Belts Floor Mats If you use a non-Honda floor mat,

make sure it fits properly and that it
LOOP
can be used with the floor mat
anchor. Do not put additional floor
mats on top of the anchored mat.
Dust and Pollen Filter

This filter removes the dust and
pollen that is brought in from the
outside through the heating and
cooling system/climate control
system.
Have your Honda dealer replace this

Clean dirty seat belts with a soft The driver’s and right rear floor filter every 30,000 miles (48,000 km)
brush and a mixture of mild soap and mats that came with your vehicle under normal conditions. It should
warm water. Do not use bleach, dye, hooks over the floor mat anchor. be replaced every 15,000 miles
or cleaning solvents that can weaken This keeps the floor mats from (24,000 km) if you drive primarily in
the belt material. Let the belts air sliding forward and possibly urban areas that have high
dry before you use the vehicle. interfering with the pedals or concentrations of soot in the air, or if
Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat marking the front passenger’s the flow from the climate control
belt anchors can cause the belts to weight sensors ineffective. system becomes less than usual.
retract slowly. Wipe the insides of
the loops with a clean cloth If you remove the floor mats, make
dampened in mild soap and warm sure to re-anchor them when you put
water or isopropyl alcohol. them back in your vehicle.
Maintenance 235
０３／０９／０３１２：０５：０９３１ＳＤＡ６１００２３９
▼
Wiper Blades
Check the condition of the wiper WIPER ARMS

blades at least every six months.
Look for signs of cracking in the
rubber, or areas that are getting
hard. Replace the blades if you find
these signs, or if they leave streaks
and unwiped areas when used.
LOCK TAB
To replace a wiper blade: 2. Disconnect the blade assembly

from the wiper arm by pushing in
1. Raise the wiper arm off the the lock tab. Hold the lock tab in
windshield. Raise the driver’s side while you push the blade assembly
first, then the passenger’s side. toward the base of the arm.
Do not open the hood when the wiper

arms are raised, or you will damage the
hood and wiper arms.
236 Maintenance
０３／０９／０３１２：０５：１９３１ＳＤＡ６１００２４０
▼
Wiper Blades
5. Slide the new wiper blade into the

BLADE BLADE holder until the tabs lock.
6. Slide the wiper blade assembly

onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
7. Lower the wiper arm down against

the windshield. Lower the
passenger’s side first, then the
driver’s side.
REINFORCEMENT
3. Remove the blade from its holder 4. Examine the new wiper blades. If
by grasping the tabbed end of the they have no plastic or metal
blade. Pull firmly until the tabs reinforcement along the back
come out of the holder. edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the new
blade.
Maintenance 237
０３／０９／０３１２：０５：３０３１ＳＤＡ６１００２４１
▼
Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your Inflation For convenience, the recommended
tires must be the proper type and Keeping the tires properly inflated tire sizes and cold air pressures are
size, in good condition with adequate provides the best combination of on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
tread, and correctly inflated. handling, tread life, and riding
comfort. For additional technical information,
The following pages give more see page 276 .
detailed information on how to take Underinflated tires wear unevenly,
care of your tires and what to do adversely affect handling and fuel Use a gauge to measure the air
when they need to be replaced. economy, and are more likely to pressure at least once a month. Even
fail from being overheated. tires that are in good condition may
lose one to two psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1
Overinflated tires can make your to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per month.
Using tires that are excessively vehicle ride more harshly, are Remember to check the spare tire at
worn or improperly inflated can more prone to damage from road the same time.
cause a crash in which you can hazards, and wear unevenly.
be seriously hurt or killed.
We recommend that you visually
Follow all instructions in this check your tires every day. If you
owner’s manual regarding tire think a tire might be low, check it
inflation and maintenance. immediately with a tire gauge.
238 Maintenance
０３／０９／０３１２：０５：４５３１ＳＤＡ６１００２４２
▼
Tires
Check the pressure in the tires when Tubeless tires have some ability to All models except LX
they are cold. This means the vehicle self-seal if they are punctured. You Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure
has been parked for at least three should look closely for punctures if a for Normal Driving
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 tire starts losing pressure. P195/65R15 89H ＊1 Front:
km). P205/60R16 91V ＊2 32 psi (220 kPa ,
You should get your own tire 2.2 kgf/cm )
Add or release air, if needed, to pressure gauge and use it whenever Rear:
match the recommended cold tire you check your tire pressures. This 30 psi (210 kPa ,
pressures on this page. will make it easier for you to tell if a 2.1 kgf/cm )
pressure loss is due to a tire problem ＊1 DX model
If you check the pressure when the and not due to a variation between ＊2 EX and V6 models
tires are hot (driven for several gauges.
miles), you will see readings 4 to 6 LX model
psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4 kgf/cm ) Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure
higher than the cold reading. This is for Normal Driving
normal; do not release air to match P205/65R15 92H Front:
the cold pressure. 30 psi (210 kPa ,
2.1 kgf/cm )
Rear:
29 psi (200 kPa ,
2.0 kgf/cm )
The compact spare tire pressure is:

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Maintenance 239
０３／０９／０３１５：４２：３９３１ＳＤＡ６１００２４３
▼
Tires
Tire Inspection Your vehicle’s tires have wear Tire Maintenance

Every time you check inflation, you indicators molded into the tread. In addition to proper inflation,
should also examine the tires for When the tread wears down to that correct wheel alignment helps to
damage, foreign objects, and wear. point, you will see a 1/2 inch (12.7 decrease tire wear. If you find a tire
mm) wide band running across the is worn unevenly, have your dealer
You should look for: tread. This shows there is less than check the wheel alignment.
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left on
Bumps or bulges in the tread or the tire. A tire that is this worn gives Have your dealer check the tires if
side of the tire. Replace the tire if very little traction on wet roads. You you feel a consistent vibration while
you find either or these conditions. should replace the tire if you can see driving. A tire should always be
the tread wear indicator in three or rebalanced if it is removed from the
Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side more places around the tire. wheel. When you have new tires
of the tire. Replace the tire if you installed, make sure they are
can see fabric or cord. balanced. This increases riding
comfort and tire life. For best results,
Excessive tread wear. have the installer perform a dynamic
balance.
U.S. LX, EX and EX-V6 models

NOTICE: Improper wheel weights can
damage your vehicle’s aluminum
wheels. Use only genuine Honda
wheels weights f or balancing.
240 Maintenance
０３／０９／０３１２：０６：１６３１ＳＤＡ６１００２４４
▼
Tires
Tire Rotation Replacing Tires It is best to replace all four tires at

Replace your tires with radial tires of the same time. If that is not possible
Front Front
the same size, load range, speed or necessary, replace the two front
rating, and maximum cold tire tires or two rear tires as a pair.
pressure rating (as shown on the Replacing just one tire can seriously
tire’s sidewall). Mixing radial and affect your vehicle’s handling.
bias-ply tires on your vehicle can
reduce braking ability, traction, and If you ever replace a wheel, make
steering accuracy. Using tires of a sure that the wheel’s specifications
different size or construction can match those of the original wheels.
cause the ABS to work inconsistently.
(For Non-directional (For Directional
Tires and Wheels) Tires and Wheels) The ABS works by comparing the
speed of the wheels. When replacing Installing improper tires on your
To help increase tire life and tires, use the same size originally vehicle can affect handling and
distribute wear more evenly, rotate supplied with the vehicle. Tire size stability. This can cause a crash
the tires every 10,000 miles (16,000 and construction can affect wheel in which you can be seriously
km). Move the tires to the positions speed and may cause the system to hurt or killed.
shown in the chart each time they work.
are rotated. If you purchase Always use the size and type of
directional tires, rotate only front-to- tires recommended in this
back. owner’s manual.
Maintenance 241
０３／０９／０３１２：０６：３０３１ＳＤＡ６１００２４５
▼
Tires
Wheels and Tires Winter Driving Snow Tires

Wheel: Tires marked ‘‘M ＋ S’’ or ‘‘All If you mount snow tires on your
DX and LX models Season’’ on the sidewall have an all- Honda, make sure they are radial
15 x 6 1/2 JJ weather tread design suitable for tires of the same size and load range
most winter driving conditions. as original tires. Mount snow tires on
All EX models all four wheels. The traction
16 x 6 1/2 JJ (Aluminum wheels For the best performance in snowy provided by snow tires on dry roads
only) or icy conditions, you should install may be lower than your original tires.
snow tires or tire chains. They may Check with the tire dealer for
LX-V6 model be required by local laws under maximum speed recommendations.
16 x 6 1/2 JJ (Steel wheels only) certain conditions.
Tire:
DX model
P195/65R15 89H
LX model
P205/65R15 92H
All EX and V6 models

P205/60R16 91V
See page 277 for DOT tire quality

grading information, and page
279 for tire size explanation.
242 Maintenance
０３／０９／０３１２：０６：４０３１ＳＤＡ６１００２４６
▼
Tires
Tire Chains When installing cables, follow the

Mount snow chains on your tires manufacturer’s instructions, and
when required by driving conditions mount them as tight as you can. Using the wrong chains, or not
or local laws. Install them only on the Make sure they are not contacting properly installing chains, can
front tires. the brake lines or suspension. Drive damage the brake lines and
slowly with them installed. If you cause a crash in which you can
Because your vehicle has limited tire hear them coming into contact with be seriously injured or killed.
clearance, Honda strongly the body or chassis, stop and
recommends using the chains listed investigate. Remove them as soon as Follow all instructions in this
below, made by Security Chain you begin driving on cleared roads. owner’s manual regarding the
Company (SCC). selection and use of tire chains.
DX
Link-type: SCC Quick Grip QG1130 NOTICE: Traction devices that are the
Cable-types: SCC Radial Chain wrong size or improperly installed can
CH2311T or SCC SC Cable SC1030 damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop
LX driving if they are hitting any part of
Link-type: SCC Quick Grip QG1134 the vehicle.
Cable-types: SCC Radial Chain
CH2311T or SCC SC Cable SC1030
EX and V6
Cable-types: SCC Radial Chain
CH2311T or SCC SC Cable SC1030
Maintenance 243
０３／０９／０３１２：０６：４９３１ＳＤＡ６１００２４７
▼
Checking the Battery
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW TEST INDICATOR WINDOW If additional battery maintenance is

needed, see your Honda dealer or a
qualified technician.
WARNING: Battery posts,

terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash your hands after handling.
If you need to connect the battery to

a charger, disconnect both cables to
4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models prevent damaging your vehicle’s
electrical system. Always disconnect
Check the condition of the battery Check the terminals for corrosion (a the negative (−) cable first, and
monthly by looking at the test white or yellowish powder). To reconnect it last.
indicator window. The label on the remove it, cover the terminals with a
battery explains the test indicator’s solution of baking soda and water. It
colors. will bubble up and turn brown. When
this stops, wash it off with plain
water. Dry off the battery with a
cloth or paper towel. Coat the
terminals with grease to help prevent
future corrosion.
244 Maintenance
０３／０９／０３１２：０６：５３３１ＳＤＡ６１００２４８
▼
Checking the Battery
The battery gives off explosive

hydrogen gas during normal
operation.
A spark or flame can cause the

battery to explode with enough
force to kill or seriously hurt you.
Wear protective clothing and a

face shield, or have a skilled
mechanic do the battery
maintenance.
Maintenance 245
０３／０９／０３１２：０７：０７３１ＳＤＡ６１００２４９
▼
Vehicle Storage
If you need to park your vehicle for If the vehicle is to be stored for a as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
an extended period (more than one longer period, it should be which can damage the paint.
month), there are several things you supported on jackstands so the
should do to prepare it for storage. tires are off the ground. If possible, periodically run the
Proper preparation helps prevent engine until it reaches full
deterioration and makes it easier to Leave one window open slightly (if operating temperature (the
get your vehicle back on the road. If the vehicle is being stored cooling fans cycle on and off
possible, store your vehicle indoors. indoors). twice). Preferably, do this once a
month.
Fill the fuel tank. Disconnect the battery. If you store your vehicle for 1 year or
longer, have your Honda dealer
Change the engine oil and filter. Support the front wiper blade perform the inspections as soon as
arms with a folded towel or rag so you take it out of storage (see pages
Wash and dry the exterior they do not touch the windshield. 200 and 202 ). The 6-cylinder model
completely. needs the inspections called for in
To minimize sticking, apply a the 2 years/30,000 miles (48,000 km)
Clean the interior. Make sure the silicone spray lubricant to all door maintenance schedule (Normal
carpeting, floor mats, etc., are and trunk seals. Also, apply a Conditions) and the 4-cylinder model
completely dry. vehicle body wax to the painted needs the inspections called for in
surfaces that mate with the door the 2 years/40,000 miles (64,000 km)
Leave the parking brake off. Put and trunk seals. maintenance schedule (Normal
the transmission in Reverse Conditions). The replacements
(5-speed manual) or Park Cover the vehicle with a called for in the maintenance
(automatic). ‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made schedule are not needed unless the
from a porous material such as vehicle has actually reached that
Block the rear wheels. cotton. Non-porous materials, such time or mileage.
246 Maintenance
０３／０９／０３１２：０７：１２３１ＳＤＡ６１００２５０
▼
Main Menu
Taking Care of the Unexpected
This section covers the more Compact Spare Tire....................... 248

common problems that motorists Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 249
experience with their vehicles. It If Your Engine Won’t Start ........... 253
gives you information about how to Nothing Happens or the
safely evaluate the problem and what Starter Motor Operates
to do to correct it. If the problem has Very Slowly............................. 253
stranded you on the side of the road, The Starter Operates
you may be able to get going again. Normally ................................. 254
If not, you will also find instructions Jump Starting ................................. 255
on getting your vehicle towed. If Your Engine Overheats............. 257
Low Oil Pressure Indicator .......... 259
Charging System Indicator........... 260
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........ 260
Readiness Codes ........................ 261
Brake System Indicator ................ 262
Closing the Moonroof ................... 263
Emergency Towing ....................... 264
Fuses ............................................... 265
Checking and Replacing ........... 265
Taking Care of the Unexpected 247

０３／０９／０３１２：０７：２４３１ＳＤＡ６１００２５１
▼
Compact Spare Tire
Use the compact spare tire as a Do not mount snow chains on the INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
temporary replacement only. Get compact spare tire.
your regular tire repaired or replaced
and put it back on your vehicle as Do not use the compact spare tire
soon as you can. if you are towing a trailer.
Check the inflation pressure of the Do not use your compact spare
compact spare tire every time you tire on another vehicle unless it is
check the other tires. It should be the same make and model.
inflated to:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm ) On all LX-V6 and EX-V6 models
Turn off the Traction Control TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
Follow these precautions: System (see page 191 ). Driving
with the compact spare tire may Replace the tire when you can see
Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). activate the TCS. the tread wear indicator bars. The
replacement should be the same size
This tire gives a harsher ride and and design tire, mounted on the
less traction on some road sur- same wheel. The spare tire is not
faces. Use greater caution while designed to be mounted on a regular
driving. wheel, and the spare wheel is not
designed for mounting a regular tire.
248 Taking Care of the Unexpected

０３／０９／０３１２：０７：３５３１ＳＤＡ６１００２５２
▼
Changing a Flat Tire
If you have a flat tire while driving, TRUNK FLOOR 3. The tools are in the trunk. Open
stop in a safe place to change it. the trunk and raise the trunk floor
Drive slowly along the shoulder until by lifting up on the back edge.
you get to an exit or an area that is
far away from the traffic lanes. 4. Take the tool kit out of the trunk.
5. Unscrew the wing bolt and take

the spare tire out of its well.
The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack, seriously injuring
anyone underneath.
TOOL KIT SPARE TIRE JACK
Follow the directions for
changing a tire exactly, and 1. Park the vehicle on firm, level and
never get under the vehicle non-slippery ground. Put the
when it is supported only by the transmission in Park (automatic)
jack. or Reverse (manual). Apply the
parking brake.
2. Turn on the hazard warning lights,

and turn the ignition switch to
LOCK (0). Have all the
passengers get out of the vehicle
while you change the tire.
CONTINUED

０３／０９／０３１２：０７：４５３１ＳＤＡ６１００２５３
▼
JACK JACKING POINT
6. The jack is behind a cover in the 7. Turn the jack’s end bracket 9. Place the jack under the jacking
right fender. Remove the cover by counterclockwise to loosen it, then point nearest the tire you need to
turning the handle counterclock- remove the jack. change. Turn the end bracket
wise, then pulling on the cover. clockwise until the top of the jack
8. Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn contacts the jacking point. Make
with the wheel wrench. sure the jacking point tab is
resting in the jack notch.

０３／０９／０３１２：０７：５５３１ＳＤＡ６１００２５４
▼
EXTENSION 11.Remove the wheel nuts and flat

tire. Place the flat tire on the
ground with the outside surface of
the wheel facing up.
WHEEL WRENCH BRAKE HUB
10.Use the extension and wheel 12.Before mounting the spare tire,
wrench as shown to raise the wipe any dirt off the mounting
vehicle until the flat tire is off the surface of the wheel and hub with
ground. a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
carefully; it may be hot from
U.S. DX, LX and LX-G model in driving.
Canada:
Do not attempt to forcibly pry the
wheel cover off with a screwdriver
or other tool. The wheel cover
cannot be removed without first
removing the wheel nuts.
CONTINUED

０３／０９／０３１２：０８：０７３１ＳＤＡ６１００２５５
▼
WING BOLT 16.LX, EX, and EX-V6 models

Remove the center cap before
storing the flat tire in the trunk
well.
17.Place the flat tire face down in the

For For spare tire well.
spare normal
tire tire
18.Remove the spacer cone from the
wing bolt, turn it over, and put it
back on the bolt.
SPACER CONE
19.Secure the flat tire by screwing
13.Put on the spare tire. Put the 15.Tighten the wheel nuts securely in the wing bolt back into its hole.
wheel nuts back on finger-tight, the same crisscross pattern. Have
then tighten them in a crisscross the wheel nut torque checked at 20.Store the jack in its holder. Turn
pattern with the wheel wrench the nearest automotive service the jack’s end bracket to lock it in
until the wheel is firmly against facility. place. Replace the cover. Store the
the hub. Do not try to tighten Tighten the wheel nuts to: tools.
them fully. 80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)
14.Lower the vehicle to the ground

and remove the jack.

０３／０９／０３１２：０８：２０３１ＳＤＡ６１００２５６
▼
Changing a Flat Tire, If the Engine Won’t Start
If the Engine Won’t Start Nothing Happens or the Starter

Diagnosing why the engine won’t Motor Operates Very Slowly
Loose items can fly around the start falls into two areas, depending When you turn the ignition switch to
interior in a crash and could on what you hear when you turn the START (III), you do not hear the
seriously injure the occupants. key to START (III): normal noise of the engine trying to
start. You may hear a clicking sound
Store the wheel, jack, and tools You hear nothing, or almost or series of clicks, or nothing at all.
securely before driving. nothing. The engine’s starter
motor does not operate at all, or Check these things:
operates very slowly. Check the transmission interlock.
21.Store the wheel cover or center If you have a manual transmission,
cap in the trunk. Make sure it does You can hear the starter motor the clutch pedal must be pushed
not get scratched or damaged. operating normally, or the starter all the way to the floor or the
motor sounds like it is spinning starter will not operate. With an
faster than normal, but the engine automatic transmission, it must be
does not start up and run. in Park or Neutral.
Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

Turn on the headlights, and check
their brightness. If the headlights
are very dim or don’t light at all,
the battery is discharged. See
Jump Starting on page 255 .
CONTINUED

０３／０９／０３１２：０８：３２３１ＳＤＡ６１００２５７
▼
If the Engine Won’t Start
Turn the ignition switch to START The Starter Operates Normally Do you have fuel? Check the fuel
(III). If the headlights do not dim, In this case, the starter motor’s gauge; the low fuel indicator may
check the condition of the fuses. If speed sounds normal, or even faster not be working.
the fuses are OK, there is than normal, when you turn the
probably something wrong with ignition switch to START (III), but There may be an electrical
the electrical circuit for the the engine does not run. problem, such as no power to the
ignition switch or starter motor. fuel pump. Check all the fuses
You will need a qualified Are you using the proper starting (see page 265 ).
technician to determine the procedure? Refer to Starting the
problem (see Emergency Towing Engine on page 179 . If you find nothing wrong, you will
on page 264 ). need a qualified technician to find
Are you using a properly coded the problem. See Emergency
If the headlights dim noticeably or key? An improperly coded key will Towing on page 264 .
go out when you try to start the cause the immobilizer system
engine, either the battery is dis- indicator in the instrument panel
charged or the connections are to blink rapidly (see page 81 ).
corroded. Check the condition of
the battery connections (see page
244 ). You can then try jump
starting the vehicle from a booster
battery (see page 255 ).

０３／０９／０３１２：０８：４２３１ＳＤＡ６１００２５８
▼
Jump Starting
Although this seems like a simple To jump start your vehicle: 3. Connect one jumper cable to the
procedure, you should take several positive (＋) terminal on your
precautions. 1. Open the hood, and check the battery. Connect the other end to
physical condition of the battery. the positive (＋) terminal on the
In very cold weather, check the booster battery.
condition of the electrolyte. If it
A battery can explode if you do seems slushy or like ice, do not try
not follow the correct procedure, jump starting until it thaws.
seriously injuring anyone
nearby. NOTICE: If a battery sits in extreme
cold, the electrolyte inside can f reeze.
Keep all sparks, open flames, Attempting to jump start with a f rozen
and smoking materials away battery can cause it to rupture.
from the battery.
2. Turn off all the electrical acces-
sories: heater, A/C, climate
You cannot start a Honda with an control, stereo system, lights, etc.
automatic transmission by pushing Put the transmission in Neutral or
or pulling it. Park, and set the parking brake.
CONTINUED

０３／０９／０３１２：０８：５３３１ＳＤＡ６１００２５９
▼
Jump Starting
7. Once your vehicle is running,

disconnect the negative cable from
your vehicle, then from the
booster battery. Disconnect the
positive cable from your vehicle,
then from the booster battery.
Keep the ends of the jumper

cables away from each other and
any metal on the vehicle until
everything is disconnected.
4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models Otherwise, you may cause an
electrical short.
4. Connect the second jumper cable 5. If the booster battery is in another
to the negative (−) terminal on vehicle, have an assistant start
the booster battery. Connect the that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
other end to the grounding strap
as shown. Do not connect this 6. Start the vehicle. If the starter
jumper cable to any other part of motor still operates slowly, check
the engine. that the jumper cables have good
metal-to-metal contact.

０３／０９／０３１２：０９：０５３１ＳＤＡ６１００２６０
▼
If the Engine Overheats
The pointer of the vehicle’s 3. If you do not see steam or spray,

temperature gauge should stay in leave the engine running, and
the midrange. If it climbs to the red Steam and spray from an watch the temperature gauge. If
mark, you should determine the overheated engine can the high heat is due to overloading,
reason (hot day, driving up a steep seriously scald you. the engine should start to cool
hill, etc.). down almost immediately. If it
Do not open the hood if steam does, wait until the temperature
If your vehicle overheats, you should is coming out. gauge comes down to the midpoint,
take immediate action. The only then continue driving.
indication may be the temperature
gauge climbing to or above the red 1. Safely pull to the side of the road. 4. If the temperature gauge stays at
mark. Or you may see steam or Put the transmission in Neutral or the red mark, turn off the engine.
spray coming from under the hood. Park, and set the parking brake.
Turn off all accessories, and turn 5. Look for any obvious coolant leaks,
NOTICE: Driving with the temperature on the hazard warning indicators. such as a split radiator hose.
gauge pointer at the red mark can Everything is still extremely hot,
cause serious damage to your engine. 2. If you see steam and/or spray so use caution. If you find a leak, it
coming from under the hood, turn must be repaired before you
off the engine. Wait until you see continue driving (see Emergency
no more signs of steam or spray, Towing on page 264 ).
then open the hood.
CONTINUED

０３／０９／０３１２：０９：１５３１ＳＤＡ６１００２６１
▼
If the Engine Overheats
6. If you don’t find an obvious leak, 8. Using gloves or large heavy cloth, 10.Put the radiator cap back on
check the coolant level in the turn the radiator cap tightly. Run the engine, and watch
radiator reserve tank (see page counterclockwise, without pushing the temperature gauge. If it goes
219 ). Add coolant if the level is down, to the first stop. After the back to the red mark, the engine
below the MIN mark. pressure releases, push down on needs repair (see Emergency
the cap, and turn it until it comes Towing on page 264 ).
7. If there was no coolant in the off.
reserve tank, you may need to add 11.If the temperature stays normal,
coolant to the radiator. Let the 9. Start the engine and set the check the coolant level in the
engine cool down until the pointer temperature control dial to radiator reserve tank. If it has
reaches the middle of the tempera- maximum (climate control to gone down, add coolant to the
ture gauge, or lower, before check- FULL AUTO at 90°F/32°C). Add MAX mark. Put the cap back on
ing the radiator. coolant to the radiator up to the tightly.
base of the filler neck. If you do
not have the proper coolant
mixture available, you can add
Removing the radiator cap plain water. Remember to have
while the engine is hot can the cooling system drained and
cause the coolant to spray out, refilled with the proper mixture as
seriously scalding you. soon as you can.
Always let the engine and

radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.

０３／０９／０３１２：０９：２４３１ＳＤＡ６１００２６２
▼
Low Oil Pressure Indicator
NOTICE: Running the engine with low 4. Start the engine and watch the oil
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR oil pressure can cause serious pressure indicator. If it does not go
mechanical damage almost immediately. out within ten seconds, turn off
Turn of f the engine as soon as you can the engine. There is a mechanical
saf ely get the vehicle stopped. problem that needs to be repaired
before you can continue driving
1. Safely pull off the road, and shut (see Emergency Towing on page
off the engine. Turn on the hazard 264 ).
warning indicators.
2. Let the vehicle sit for a minute.

Open the hood, and check the oil
level (see page 168 ). An engine
This light should never come on very low on oil can lose pressure
when the engine is running. If it during cornering and other driving
starts flashing or stays on, the oil maneuvers.
pressure has dropped very low or
lost pressure. Serious engine 3. If necessary, add oil to bring the
damage is possible and you should level back to the full mark on the
take immediate action. dipstick (see page 214 ).

０３／０９／０３１２：０９：３５３１ＳＤＡ６１００２６３
▼
Charging System Indicator, Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Charging System Indicator Immediately turn off all electrical Malfunction Indicator Lamp
accessories. Try not to use other
electrically operated controls such as MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
the power windows. Keep the engine
running; starting the engine will
discharge the battery rapidly.
Go to a service station or garage
where you can get technical
assistance.
CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR
If the charging system indicator If the indicator comes on while

comes on brightly when the engine driving, it means one of the engine’s
is running, the battery is not being emission control systems may have a
charged. problem. Even though you may feel
no difference in your vehicle’s
performance, continued operation
may cause serious damage.

０３／０９／０３１２：０９：４３３１ＳＤＡ６１００２６４
▼
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
If you have recently refueled your Readiness Codes To check if they are set, turn the
vehicle, the cause of this indicator Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness ignition to ON (II), without starting
coming on could be a loose or codes’’ that are part of the on-board the engine. The Malfunction
missing fuel fill cap. Check the cap diagnostics for the emissions Indicator Lamp will come on for 20
or replace it. Tightening the cap will systems. In some states, part of the seconds. If it then goes off, the
not make the indicator turn off emissions testing is to make sure readiness codes are set. If it blinks 5
immediately; it takes at least three these codes are set. If they are not times, the readiness codes are not
days of normal driving. set, the test cannot be completed. set. If possible, do not take your
vehicle for a state emissions test
If the indicator remains on or the If your vehicle’s battery has been until the readiness codes are set.
fuel cap was not loose or missing, disconnected or gone dead, these Refer to State Emissions Testing for
have the vehicle checked by the codes are erased. It takes at least more information (see page 285 ).
dealer as soon as possible. three days of driving under various
conditions to set the codes again.
NOTICE: If you keep driving with the
Malf unction Indicator Lamp on, you
can damage your vehicle’s emissions
controls and engine. Those repairs may
not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranties. This indicator may also
come on with the ‘‘D’’ indicator.

０３／０９／０３１２：０９：５２３１ＳＤＡ６１００２６５
▼
Brake System Indicator
However, if the brake pedal does not Slow down by shifting to a lower
BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR＊
feel normal, you should take gear, and pull to the side of the road
immediate action. A problem in one when it is safe. Because of the long
part of the system’s dual circuit distance needed to stop, it is
design will still give you braking at hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
two wheels. You will feel the brake should have it towed and repaired as
pedal go down much farther before soon as possible (see Emergency
the vehicle begins to slow down, and Towing on page 264 ).
you will have to press harder on the
pedal. If you must drive the vehicle a short
distance in this condition, drive
＊
U.S. indicator shown slowly and carefully.
If the brake system indicator comes If the ABS indicator comes on with
on while driving, the brake fluid level this indicator, have the vehicle
is probably low in the reservoir. inspected by your Honda dealer
Press lightly on the brake pedal to immediately.
see if it feels normal. If it does,
check the brake fluid level the next
time you stop at a service station
(see page 225 ). If the fluid level is
low, take your vehicle to the dealer
and have the brake system inspected
for leaks or worn brake pads.

０３／０９／０３１２：１０：０２３１ＳＤＡ６１００２６６
▼
Closing the Moonroof
On all EX and EX-V6 models ROUND PLUG SOCKET

If the electric motor will not close
the moonroof, do the following:
1. Check the fuse for the moonroof

motor (see page 265 ). If the fuse
is blown, replace it with one of the
same or lower rating.
2. Try closing the moonroof. If the

new fuse blows immediately or the
moonroof motor still does not
operate, you can close the
moonroof manually. 4. Use a screwdriver or coin to 5. Insert the moonroof wrench into
remove the round plug in the the socket behind this plug. Turn
3. Get the moonroof wrench out of center of the headliner. the wrench until the moonroof is
the tool kit in the trunk. fully closed.
6. Remove the wrench. Reinstall the

round plug.

０３／０９／０３１２：１０：１８３１ＳＤＡ６１００２６７
▼
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle needs to be towed, NOTICE: Improper towing preparation Do not use the sling-type towing
call a professional towing service or will damage the transmission. Follow equipment. This type of towing is
an organization. Never tow your the above procedure exactly. If you unacceptable as your vehicle’s
vehicle with just a rope or chain. It is cannot shif t the transmission or start suspension and body can be
very dangerous. the engine (automatic transmission), seriously damaged.
your vehicle must be transported with
The best way you can safely tow the f ront wheels of f the ground. NOTICE: The steering system can be
your vehicle is with flat-bed damaged if the steering wheel is locked.
equipment. The operator will load With the front wheels on the ground, Leave the ignition switch in Accessory
your vehicle on the back of a truck. it is best to tow the vehicle no farther (I), and make sure the steering wheel
If your Honda cannot be transported than 50 miles (80 km), and keep the turns f reely bef ore you begin towing.
by flat-bed, it should be towed by speed below 35 mph (55 km/h).
wheel-lift equipment with the front NOTICE: Trying to lif t or tow your
wheels off the ground. If, due to If you decide to tow your vehicle vehicle by the bumpers will cause
damage, your vehicle must be towed with all four wheels on the ground, serious damage. The bumpers are not
with the front wheels on the ground, make sure you use a properly- designed to support the vehicle’s weight.
do the following: designed and attached tow bar.
Prepare the vehicle for towing as
5-speed Manual Transmission: described above, and leave the
Release the parking brake. ignition switch in Accessory (I) so
Shift the transmission to Neutral. the steering wheel does not lock.
Automatic Transmission: Make sure the radio and any items
Release the parking brake. plugged into the accessory power
Start the engine. socket are turned off so they do not
Shift to D, then to N. run down the battery.
Turn off the engine.

０３／０９／０３１２：１０：２９３１ＳＤＡ６１００２６８
▼
Fuses
INTERIOR UNDER-HOOD Checking and Replacing Fuses

If something electrical in your
vehicle stops working, the first thing
you should check for is a blown fuse.
TAB Determine from the chart on pages
268 and 269 , or the diagram on the
fuse box lid, which fuse or fuses
control that component. Check those
fuses first, but check all the fuses
before deciding that a blown fuse is
not the cause. Replace any blown
fuses and check if the device works.
The interior fuse box is on the The under-hood fuse box is located 1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK
driver’s lower left side. To remove near the back of the engine compart- (0). Make sure the headlights and
the fuse box lid, pull it toward you ment on the driver’s side. To open it, all other accessories are off.
and take it out of its hinges. push the tabs as shown.
2. Remove the cover from the fuse
box.
CONTINUED

０３／０９／０３１２：１０：３７３１ＳＤＡ６１００２６９
▼
Fuses
BLOWN BLOWN BLOWN
3. Check each of the large fuses in 4. Check the smaller fuses in the
the under-hood fuse box by under-hood fuse box and all the
looking at the wire inside. fuses in the interior fuse box by
Removing these fuses requires a pulling out each fuse with the fuse
Phillips-head screwdriver. puller provided in the under-hood
fuse box.
5. Look for a burned wire inside the

fuse. If it is burned, replace it with
one of the spare fuses of the same
rating or lower.

０３／０９／０３１２：１０：４５３１ＳＤＡ６１００２７０
▼
Fuses
If you replace the blown fuse with a

FUSE PULLER spare fuse that has a lower rating, it
might blow out again. This does not
indicate anything wrong. Replace the
fuse with one of the correct rating as
soon as you can.
NOTICE: Replacing a f use with one

that has a higher rating greatly
increases the chances of damaging the
electrical system. If you do not have a
replacement f use with the proper rating
f or the circuit, install one with a lower
If you cannot drive the vehicle rating.
without fixing the problem, and you
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse 6. If the replacement fuse of the
of the same rating or a lower rating same rating blows in a short time,
from one of the other circuits with there is probably a serious
the fuse puller provided in the under- electrical problem in your vehicle.
hood fuse box. Make sure you can Leave the blown fuse in that
do without that circuit temporarily circuit, and have your vehicle
(such as the accessory power socket checked by a qualified mechanic.
or radio).
CONTINUED

０３／０９／０３１２：１０：５５３１ＳＤＡ６１００２７１
▼
Fuses
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX

No. Amps. Circuits Protected
11 20 A Cooling Fan
11＊ 30 A Cooling Fan
12 7.5 A MG. Clutch
13 20 A Horn, Stop
14 40 A Rear Defroster
15 40 A Back Up, ACC
16 15 A Hazard
17 30 A ABS Motor
17＊ 30 A TCS Motor
18 20 A ABS F/S
18＊ 40 A TCS
19 40 A Heated Seats
20 (40 A) Condenser Fan
No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected 21 40 A Heater Motor
22 100 A Battery
1 10 A Left Headlight Low 6 10 A Right Headlight Low − Not Used
2 (30A) (Rear Defroster Coil) 7 7.5 A Back Up 23 50 A ＋B IG1 Main
3 10 A Left Headlight Hi 8 15 A FI ECU 50 A Power Window Main
4 15 A Small Light 9 20 A Condenser fan
5 10 A Right Headlight Hi 10 − Not Used ＊ : 6-cylinder models

０３／０９／０３１２：１１：０７３１ＳＤＡ６１００２７２
▼
Fuses
INTERIOR FUSE BOX

No. Amps. Circuits Protected
13 (20 A) Passenger’s Power Seat Recline

14 (20 A) Driver’s Power Seat Slide
15 (20 A) Heated Seat
16 (20 A) Driver’s Power Seat Recline
17 (20 A) Passenger’s Power Seat Slide
18 15 A IG ACG
19 15 A IG Fuel Pump
20 7.5 A IG Washer
21 7.5 A IG Meter
22 10 A IG SRS
23 7.5 A IGP (PGM-FI ECU)
24 20 A Left Rear Power Window
25 20 A Right Rear Power Window
No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected 26 20 A Right Front Power Window
27 20 A Driver’s Power Window
1＊1 (15 A) Drive by Wire 7 10 A Back-Up Lights 28 (20 A) Moonroof
2 15 A Ignition Coil 8 20 A Door Lock 29 − Not Used
3＊2 (10 A) Day Light 9 15 A Front Accessory Sockets 30 7.5 A IG HAC
4 15 A Laf Heater 10 7.5 A IG OPDS 31 − Not Used
5 10 A Radio 11 30 A IG Wiper 32 7.5 A ACC
6 7.5 A Interior Light 12 − Not Used 33 7.5 A HAC OP
＊1 : 6-cylinder models
＊2 : On Canadian models

０３／０９／０３１２：１１：１５３１ＳＤＡ６１００２７４
▼
Main Menu
Technical Information
The diagrams in this section give Identification Numbers ................. 272 Oxygenated Fuels.......................... 280
you the dimensions and capacities of Specifications ................................. 274 Driving in Foreign Countries ....... 281
your Honda, and the locations of the DOT Tire Quality Grading Emissions Controls........................ 282
identification numbers. It also (U. S. Vehicles) ...................... 277 The Clean Air Act ...................... 282
includes information you should Uniform Tire Quality Crankcase Emissions Control
know about your vehicle’s tires and Grading ................................... 277 System..................................... 282
emissions control systems. Treadwear .................................. 277 Evaporative Emissions Control
Traction....................................... 277 System..................................... 282
Temperature .............................. 278 Onboard Refueling Vapor
Tire Labeling .................................. 279 Recovery ................................. 282
Exhaust Emissions Controls .... 283
PGM-FI System ..................... 283
Ignition Timing Control
System................................. 283
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
(EGR) System .................... 283
Three Way Catalytic
Converter ............................ 283
Replacement Parts..................... 283
Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 284
State Emissions Testing ............... 285
Technical Information 271

０３／０９／０３１２：１１：２２３１ＳＤＡ６１００２７５
▼
Identification Numbers
Your vehicle has several identifying

numbers in various places. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number

(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
Honda dealer uses to register your
vehicle for warranty purposes. It is
also necessary for licensing and
insuring your vehicle. The easiest
place to find the VIN is on a plate
fastened to the top of the dashboard.
You can see it by looking through
the windshield on the driver’s side. It
is also on the Certification label at-
tached to the driver’s doorjamb, and
is stamped on the engine com-
partment bulkhead. The VIN is also
provided in bar code on the
Certification label.
CERTIFICATION LABEL
272 Technical Information

０３／０９／０３１２：１１：２９３１ＳＤＡ６１００２７６
▼
Identification Numbers
The Engine Number is stamped into 4-cylinder Models 6-cylinder Models

the engine block. It is on the front.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER ENGINE NUMBER
The Transmission Number is on a
label on top of the transmission. ENGINE
NUMBER
MANUAL
TRANSMISSION
NUMBER AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER

０３／０９／０３１２：１１：５０３１ＳＤＡ６１００２７７
▼
Specifications
Dimensions Capacities
Length 189.5 in (4,813 mm) Engine Change＊2
Width 71.7 in (1,820 mm) coolant Manual 1.35 US gal (5.1 )
Height 57.2 in (1,453 mm) Automatic 1.32 US gal (5.0 )
Wheelbase 107.9 in (2,740 mm) 1.77 US gal (6.7 ) ＊1
Track Front 61.1 in (1,553 mm) Total
Rear 61.2 in (1,554 mm) Manual 1.90 US gal (7.2 )
Automatic 1.88 US gal (7.1 )
Weights 2.22 US gal (8.4 ) ＊1
Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attached Engine oil Change＊3
to the driver’s doorjamb. Including 4.4 US qt (4.2 )
filter 4.5 US qt (4.3 ) ＊1
Air Conditioning Without 4.2 US qt (4.0 )
Refrigerant type HFC-134a (R-134a) filter
Charge quantity 25−27 oz (700−750 g) Total 5.6 US qt (5.3 )
16−18 oz (450−500 g)＊1 5.3 US qt (5.0 ) ＊1
Lubricant type ND-OIL8 Manual trans- Change 2.0 US qt (1.9 )
mission oil Total 2.2 US qt (2.1 )
Capacities Automatic Change 3.0 US qt (2.8 )
Fuel tank Approx. transmission 3.1 US qt (2.9 ) ＊1
17.09 US gal (64.7 ) fluid Total 6.9 US qt (6.5 )
7.6 US qt (7.2 ) ＊1
＊1 : 6-cylinder models Windshield U.S. Vehicles 2.6 US qt (2.5 )
washer Canada Vehicles 4.8 US qt (4.5 )
reservoir
＊2 : Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine.
Reserve tank capacity: 0.16 US gal (0.6 )
＊3 : Excluding the oil remaining in the engine.

０３／０９／０３１２：１２：１９３１ＳＤＡ６１００２７８
▼
Specifications
Lights Engine
Headlights High 12 V − 60 W (HB3) Type Water cooled 4-stroke, DOHC
Low 12 V − 51 W (HB4) i-VTEC 4-cylinder, SOHC VTEC
Front turn signal/ 12 V − 24/2.2 CP 6-cylinder (V6), gasoline engine
Front parking lights Bore x Stroke 3.43 x 3.9 in (87.0 x 99.0 mm) ＊3
Rear turn signal lights 12 V − 21 W (Amber) 3.39 x 3.39 in (86.0 x 86.0 mm)＊4
Stop/Taillights 12 V − 21/5 W Displacement 143.6 cu-in (2,354 cm ) ＊3
Taillights 12 V − 2 CP 182.8 cu-in (2,997 cm ) ＊4
High-mount brake light 12 V − 21 W Compression ratio 9.7 : 1＊3
Back-up lights 12 V − 21 W 10 : 1 ＊4
License plate light 12 V − 3 CP Spark plugs NGK: IZFR6K-11＊3, ＊4
Ceiling light 12 V − 8W DENSO: SKJ20DR-M11＊3, ＊4
Spotlights 12 V − 8 W＊1 NGK: IZFR6K-13 ＊3, ＊5
Spotlights/Front ceiling lights 12 V − 8 W＊2 DENSO: SKJ20DR-M13 ＊3, ＊5
Trunk light 12 V − 5W
Door courtesy light 12 V − 2 CP ＊3 : 4-cylinder models
Vanity mirror lights 12 V − 1.1 W ＊4 : 6-cylinder models
＊1 : LX ＊5 : On some models
＊2 : EX
Alignment
Battery Toe-in Front 0.00 in (0.0 mm)
Capacity 4-cylinder 12 V − 38 AH/5 HR Rear 0.08 in (2.0 mm)
6-cylinder 12 V − 52 AH/5 HR Camber Front 0°
Rear −1°
Fuses Caster Front 3°15’
Interior See page 269 or the fuse label
attached to the inside of the fuse
box door on each side of the
dashboard.
Under-hood See page 268 or the fuse box
cover. CONTINUED

０３／０９／０３１２：１２：２７３１ＳＤＡ６１００２７９
▼
Specifications
Tires
Size Front/Rear P195/65R15 89H ＊1
P205/65R15 92H ＊2
P205/60R16 91V ＊3
Spare T135/90D15
Pressure Front 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm ) ＊1, 3
30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm ) ＊2
Rear 30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm ) ＊1, 3
29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm ) ＊2
Spare 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
＊1 : DX
＊2 : LX
＊3 : All EX and V6 models

０３／０９／０３１２：１２：３８３１ＳＤＡ６１００２８０
▼
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your car meet all U.S. Treadwear Traction − AA, A, B, C
Federal Safety Requirements. All The treadwear grade is a compara- The traction grades, from highest to
tires are also graded for treadwear, tive rating based on the wear rate of lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
traction, and temperature perform- the tire when tested under controlled grades represent the tire’s ability to
ance according to Department of conditions on a specified government stop on wet pavement as measured
Transportation (DOT) standards. test course. For example, a tire under controlled conditions on
The following explains these graded 150 would wear one and one- specified government test surfaces
gradings. half (1 1/2) times as well on the of asphalt and concrete. A tire
government course as a tire graded marked C may have poor traction
Uniform Tire Quality Grading 100. The relative performance of performance.
Quality grades can be found where tires depends upon the actual condi-
applicable on the tire sidewall tions of their use, however, and may Warning: The traction grade
between the tread shoulder and the depart significantly from the norm assigned to this tire is based on
maximum section width. For due to variations in driving habits, straight-ahead braking traction tests,
example: service practices, and differences in and does not include acceleration,
Treadwear 200 road characteristics and climate. cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
Traction AA traction characteristics.
Temperature A
All passenger vehicle tires must

conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in addition to these
grades.

０３／０９／０３１２：１２：４４３１ＳＤＡ６１００２８１
▼
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Temperature − A, B, C Warning: The temperature grade for

The temperature grades are A (the this tire is established for a tire that
highest), B, and C, representing the is properly inflated and not over-
tire’s resistance to the generation of loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-
heat and its ability to dissipate heat tion, or excessive loading, either
when tested under controlled separately or in combination, can
conditions on a specified indoor cause heat buildup and possible tire
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high failure.
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance, which all passenger
vehicle tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by
law.

０３／０９／０３１２：１３：００３１ＳＤＡ６１００２８２
▼
Tire Labeling
Tire Labeling 16 − Rim diameter in inches. 2202 − Date of manufacture.

The tires that came on your vehicle
have a number of markings. Those 91 − Load index (a numerical code
you should be aware of are described associated with the maximum
below. load the tire can carry).
Tire Size V − Speed symbol (an

Whenever tires are replaced, they alphabetical code indicating
should be replaced with tires of the the maximum speed rating).
same size. Following is an example
of tire size with an explanation of Tire Identification Number
what each component means. Tire Identification Number (TIN) is
a group of numbers and letters that
P205/60R16 91V look like the following example TIN.
P − Vehicle type (P indicates DOT B97R FW6X 2202

passenger vehicle).
DOT − This indicates that the tire
205 − Tire width in millimeters. meets all requirements of
the U.S. Department of
60 − Aspect ratio (the tire’s section Transportation.
height as a percentage of its
width). B97R − Manufacturer’s
identification mark.
R − Tire construction code (R
indicates radial). FW6X − Tire type code.

０３／０９／０３１２：１３：１０３１ＳＤＡ６１００２８３
▼
Oxygenated Fuels
Some conventional gasolines are The following are the U.S. EPA and If you notice any undesirable
being blended with alcohol or an Canadian CGSB approved operating symptoms, try another
ether compound. These gasolines percentages of oxygenates: service station or switch to another
are collectively referred to as brand of gasoline.
oxygenated fuels. To meet clean air ETHANOL (ethyl or grain alcohol)
standards, some areas of the United You may use gasoline containing up Fuel system damage or performance
States and Canada use oxygenated to 10 percent ethanol by volume. problems resulting from the use of
fuels to help reduce emissions. Gasoline containing ethanol may be an oxygenated fuel containing more
marketed under the name ‘‘Gasohol.’’ than the percentages of oxygenates
If you use an oxygenated fuel, be given above are not covered under
sure it is unleaded and meets the MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl warranty.
minimum octane rating requirement. Ether)
You may use gasoline containing up
Before using an oxygenated fuel, try to 15 percent MTBE by volume.
to confirm the fuel’s contents. Some
states/provinces require this METHANOL (methyl or wood
information to be posted on the alcohol)
pump. Your vehicle was not designed to use
fuel that contains methanol.
Methanol can corrode metal parts in
the fuel system, and also damage
plastic and rubber components. This
damage would not be covered by
your warranties.

０３／０９／０３１２：１３：１４３１ＳＤＡ６１００２８４
▼
Driving in Foreign Countries
If you are planning to take your

Honda outside the U.S. or Canada,
contact the tourist bureaus in the
areas you will be traveling in to find
out about the availability of unleaded
gasoline with the proper octane
rating.
If unleaded gasoline is not available,

be aware that using leaded gasoline
in your Honda will affect perfor-
mance and fuel mileage, and damage
its emissions controls. It will no
longer comply with U.S. and
Canadian emissions regulations, and
will be illegal to operate in North
America. To bring your vehicle back
into compliance will require the re-
placement of several components,
such as the oxygen sensors and the
three way catalytic converter. These
replacements are not covered under
warranty.

０３／０９／０３１２：１３：２５３１ＳＤＡ６１００２８５
▼
Emissions Controls
The burning of gasoline in your The Clean Air Act case Ventilation valve routes them
vehicle’s engine produces several by- The United States Clean Air Act＊ from the crankcase back to the
products. Some of these are carbon sets standards for automobile intake manifold. They are then
monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen emissions. It also requires that drawn into the engine and burned.
(NOx) and hydrocarbons (HC). automobile manufacturers explain to
Gasoline evaporating from the tank owners how their emissions controls Evaporative Emissions Control
also produces hydrocarbons. Con- work and what to do to maintain System
trolling the production of NOx, CO, them. This section summarizes how As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
and HC is important to the environ- the emissions controls work. tank, an evaporative emissions
ment. Under certain conditions of Scheduled maintenance is on pages control canister filled with charcoal
sunlight and climate, NOx and HC 204 and 206 . adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
react to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’ canister while the engine is off. After
＊
Carbon monoxide does not contri- In Canada, Honda vehicles comply the engine is started and warmed up,
bute to smog creation, but it is a with the Canadian emission the vapor is drawn into the engine
poisonous gas. requirements, as specified in an and burned during driving.
agreement with Environment
Canada, at the time they are Onboard Refueling Vapor
manufactured. Recovery
The Onboard Refueling Vapor
Crankcase Emissions Control Recovery (ORVR) system captures
System the fuel vapors during refueling. The
Your vehicle has a Positive vapors are adsorbed in a canister
Crankcase Ventilation System. This filled with activated carbon. While
keeps gasses that build up in the driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
engine’s crankcase from going into into the engine and burned off.
the atmosphere. The Positive Crank-

０３／０９／０３１２：１３：３８３１ＳＤＡ６１００２８６
▼
Emissions Controls
Exhaust Emissions Controls ing conditions. Replacement Parts

The exhaust emissions controls The emissions control systems are
include four systems: PGM-FI, Ignition Timing Control System designed and certified to work to-
Ignition Timing Control, Exhaust This system constantly adjusts the gether in reducing emissions to
Gas Recirculation and Three Way ignition timing, reducing the amount levels that comply with the Clean Air
Catalytic Converter. These four of HC, CO, and NOx produced. Act. To make sure the emissions
systems work together to control the remain low, you should use only new
engine’s combustion and minimize Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Honda replacement parts or their
the amount of HC, CO, and NOx that System equivalent for repairs. Using lower
comes out the tailpipe. The exhaust The Exhaust Gas Recirculation quality parts may increase the
emissions control systems are (EGR) system takes some of the emissions from your vehicle.
separate from the crankcase and exhaust gas and routes it back into
evaporative emissions control the intake manifold. Adding exhaust The emissions control systems are
systems. gas to the air/fuel mixture reduces covered by warranties separate from
the amount of NOx produced when the rest of your vehicle. Read your
PGM-FI System the fuel is burned. warranty manual for more informa-
The PGM-FI System uses sequential tion.
multiport fuel injection. Three Way Catalytic Converter
It has three subsystems: Air Intake, The three way catalytic converter is
Engine Control, and Fuel Control. in the exhaust system. Through
The Engine Control Module (ECM) chemical reactions, it converts HC,
or the Powertrain Control Module CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
(PCM) uses various sensors to to carbon dioxide (CO2), dinitrogen
determine how much air is going (N2), and water vapor.
into the engine. It then controls how
much fuel to inject under all operat-

０３／０９／０３１２：１３：４８３１ＳＤＡ６１００２８７
▼
Three Way Catalytic Converter
The three way catalytic converter

contains precious metals that serve
as catalysts, promoting chemical
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converter is referred to
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts
on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement
unit must be an original Honda part
or its equivalent.
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERS
The three way catalytic converter 4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take A defective three way catalytic Keep the engine tuned-up.
place. It can set on fire any com- converter contributes to air pollution,
bustible materials that come near it. and can impair your engine’s per- Have your vehicle diagnosed and
Park your vehicle away from high formance. Follow these guidelines to repaired if it is misfiring, back-
grass, dry leaves, or other flamma- protect your vehicle’s three way firing, stalling, or otherwise not
bles. catalytic converter. running properly.
Always use unleaded gasoline.

Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converter ineffective.

０３／０９／０３１２：１３：５７３１ＳＤＡ６１００２８８
▼
State Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes If the testing facility determines that Without touching the accelerator
If you take your vehicle for a state the readiness codes are not set, you pedal, start the engine, and let it
emissions test shortly after the will be requested to return at a later idle for 20 seconds.
battery has been disconnected or date to complete the test. If you must
gone dead, it may not pass the test. get the vehicle re-tested within the Keep the vehicle in Park
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness next two or three days, you can (automatic transmission) or
codes’’ that must be set in the on- condition the vehicle for re-testing Neutral (manual transmission).
board diagnostics for the emissions by doing the following. Increase the engine speed to 2,000
systems. These codes are erased rpm and hold it there until the
when the battery is disconnected, Make sure the gas tank is nearly, temperature gauge rises to at least
and set again only after several days but not completely, full (around 1/4 of the scale (approximately 3
of driving under a variety of 3/4). minutes).
conditions.
Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 8
hours or more.
Make sure the ambient

temperature is between 20° and
95°F.
CONTINUED

０３／０９／０３１２：１４：０４３１ＳＤＡ６１００２８９
▼
State Emissions Testing
Select a nearby lightly traveled Then drive in city/suburban

major highway where you can traffic for at least 10 minutes.
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph When traffic conditions allow, let
(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 the vehicle coast for several
minutes. Drive on the highway in seconds without using the
D (A/T) or 5th (M/T). Do not use accelerator pedal or the brake
the cruise control. When traffic pedal.
allows, drive for 90 seconds
without moving the accelerator If the testing facility determines the
pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary readiness codes are still not set, see
slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot your Honda dealer.
do this for a continuous 90
seconds because of traffic
conditions, drive for at least 30
seconds, then repeat it two more
times (for a total of 90 seconds).

０３／０９／０３１２：１４：０８３１ＳＤＡ６１００２９０
▼
Main Menu
Warranty and Customer Relations
Customer Service Information..... 288

Warranty Coverages ..................... 289
Reporting Safety Defects
(U.S. Vehicle) ............................. 290
Authorized Manuals ...................... 291
Warranty and Customer Relations 287

０３／０９／０３１２：１４：１８３１ＳＤＡ６１００２９１
▼
Customer Service Information
Honda dealership personnel are U.S. Owners: In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
trained professionals. They should American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Islands:
be able to answer all your questions. Automobile Customer Service
If you encounter a problem that your Mail Stop 500-2N-7A Bella International
dealership does not solve to your 1919 Torrance Boulevard P.O. Box 190816
satisfaction, please discuss it with Torrance, California 90501-2746 San Juan, Puerto Rico 00919-0816
the dealership’s management. The
Service Manager or General Tel: (800) 999-1009 (787) 250-4318
Manager can help. Almost all
problems are solved in this way. Canadian Owners: When you call or write, please give
CUSTOMER RELATIONS us this information:
If you are dissatisfied with the RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÉLE
decision made by the dealership’s Honda Canada Inc. Vehicle Identification Number
management, contact your Honda 715 Milner Avenue (see page 272 )
Customer Service Office. Toronto, ON Name and address of the dealer
M1B 2K8 who services your vehicle
Date of purchase
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9 Mileage on your vehicle
Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909 Your name, address, and tele-
Toronto (416) 287-4776 phone number
A detailed description of the
problem
Name of the dealer who sold the
vehicle to you
288 Warranty and Customer Relations

０３／０９／０３１２：１４：３２３１ＳＤＡ６１００２９２
▼
Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners Seat Belt Limited Warranty − a seat Replacement Battery Limited
Your new Honda is covered by these belt that fails to function properly is Warranty − provides prorated
warranties: covered for the useful life of the coverage for a replacement battery
vehicle. purchased from a Honda dealer.
New Vehicle Limited Warranty −
covers your new vehicle, except for Rust Perforation Limited Warranty Replacement Muffler Lifetime
the battery, emissions control − all exterior body panels are Limited Warranty − provides
systems, and accessories, against covered for rust-through from the coverage for as long as the pur-
defects in materials and inside for the specified time period chaser of the muffler owns the
workmanship. with no mileage limit. vehicle.
Emissions Control Systems Defects Accessory Limited Warranty − Restrictions and exclusions apply to
Warranty and Emissions Honda Accessories are covered all these warranties. Please read the
Performance Warranty − these two under this warranty. Time and 2004 Honda Warranty Information
warranties cover your vehicle’s emis- mileage limits depend on the type of booklet that came with your vehicle
sions control systems. Time, mileage, accessory and other factors. Please for precise information on warranty
and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty manual for coverages. Your Honda’s original
read the warranty manual for exact details. tires are covered by their
information. manufacturer. Tire warranty infor-
Replacement Parts Limited mation is in a separate booklet.
Original Equipment Battery Limited Warranty − covers all Honda
Warranty − this warranty gives up replacement parts against defects in Canadian Owners
to 100 percent credit toward a materials and workmanship. Please refer to the 2004 Warranty
replacement battery. Manual that came with your vehicle.
Warranty and Customer Relations 289

０３／０９／０３１２：１４：３８３１ＳＤＡ６１００２９３
▼
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
If you believe that your vehicle has a If NHTSA receives similar com- To contact NHTSA, you may either
defect which could cause a crash or plaints, it may open an investigation, call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free
could cause injury or death, you and if it finds that a safety defect at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
should immediately inform the exists in a group of vehicles, it may Washington D.C. area) or write to:
National Highway Traffic Safety order a recall and remedy campaign. NHTSA, U.S. Department of
Administration (NHTSA) in addition However, NHTSA cannot become Transportation, Washington,
to notifying Acura Automobile involved in individual problems D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
Division, American Honda Motor Co., between you, your dealer, or other information about motor
Inc. American Honda Motor Co., Inc. vehicle safety from the Hotline.
290 Warranty and Customer Relations

０３／０９／０３１２：１４：５２３１ＳＤＡ６１００２９４
▼
Authorized Manuals
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) Valid only for sales within the U.S. Canadian owners should
The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm contact their authorized Honda dealer.
Incorporated. You can order in any of three ways:
Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this page ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356
Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only) (NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)
Go online at www. helminc. com Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. − 6:00 P.M. EST
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc. MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00
at 1-800-782-4356 OR
Publication Form Description Price By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You can
Form Number Each＊ pay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail to
61SDA04 2003-2004 Honda Accord 2/4 Door L4 $70.00 Helm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.
Service Manual Base Book
61SDA05 2003-2004 Honda Accord 2/4 Door V6 $40.00 VEHICLE MODEL Price Total
PUBLICATION NUMBER Qty
Service Manual Supplement ２ Name Year Each＊ Price
61SDA04EL 2003-2004 Honda 2/4 Door L4/V6 $50.00 ０
０
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual ４
61SDA30 2003-2004 Honda 2/4 Door L4/V6 $44.00
Body Repair Manual Ｈ
Ｏ
31SDA610 2004 Honda Accord 4 Door L4/V6 $34.00
Ｎ
Owner’s Manual
31SDA710 2004 Honda Accord L4/V6 Navigation Manual $29.00 ＊
Prices are subject to change without TOTAL MATERIAL
31SDAQ10 2004 Honda Accord 4 Door L4/V6 $12.00 notice and without incurring obligation.
Mich. Purchases
Quick Start Guide Add 6% Sales Tax
HON-R Order Form for Previous Years- FREE Orders are mailed within 10 days. Please HANDLING CHARGE $6.95
Indicate Year and Model Desired allow adequate time for delivery.
＊ GRAND TOTAL
Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring
obligation.
291
０３／０９／０３１２：１５：０２３１ＳＤＡ６１００２９５
▼
Authorized Manuals
NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name, Service Manual:
and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment should
be sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shown This manual covers maintenance and recommended
below for a quotation. procedures for repair to engine and chassis components.
Ｓ It is written for the journeyman mechanic, but is simple
Ｈ enough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-
Ｉ stand.
Customer Name Attention
Ｐ
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
Ｔ Street Address − No P.O. Box Number Apartment Number
This manual complements the Service Manual by
Ｏ providing in-depth troubleshooting information for each
City State & Zip Code
electrical circuit in your vehicle.
Daytime Telephone Number ( )
Body Repair Manual:
This manual describes the procedures involved in the
Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc − U.S. funds only. replacement of damaged body parts.
Ｐ Do not send cash
Ａ Master VISA Check here if your billing address is different

Ｙ Card from the shipping address shown above.
Ｍ Account Number Expiration: Mo. Yr.
Ｅ −
Ｎ
Ｔ
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE DATE
These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14
days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.
P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356
292
０３／０９／０３１２：１５：０８３１ＳＤＡ６１００２９６
▼
Main Menu
Index
A B Headlights .................................. 228

High-mount Brake Light .......... 234
Accessories..................................... 171 Battery Specifications ............................. 275
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key Charging System Trunk Light ................................ 233
Position) ........................................ 82 Indicator............................ 62, 260 Turn Signal Lights ..................... 231
Accessory Power Socket .............. 107 Jump Starting ............................. 255 Bulbs, Halogen ............................... 228
Additives, Engine Oil..................... 215 Maintenance ............................... 244
Airbag (SRS) ...................................... 9 Specifications ............................. 275 C
Airbag System Components ........... 22 Before Driving ............................... 163
Air Conditioning............................. 110 Belts, Seat ........................................... 8 Capacities Chart............................. 274
Usage .......................................... 115 Beverage Holders .......................... 107 Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 56
Air Pressure, Tires ........................ 239 Brakes Carrying Cargo .............................. 173
Alcohol in Gasoline ........................ 280 Anti-lock System (ABS) ............ 189 CAUTION, Explanation of ............... ii
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) Break-in, New Linings .............. 164 CD Changer.................................... 132
Description ................................. 189 Bulb Replacement ..................... 233 CD Player ............................... 130, 131
Indicator ................................ 63, 190 Fluid ............................................ 225 CD Pocket, Center......................... 106
Operation .................................... 188 Parking ........................................ 104 Certification Label ......................... 272
Anti-theft Steering Column Lock .. 82 System Indicator .......................... 62 Chains ............................................. 243
Audio System ......... 122, 130, 132, 140 Wear Indicators ......................... 188 Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 249
Automatic Speed Control.............. 155 Braking System.............................. 188 Changing Oil
Automatic Transmission............... 182 Break-in, New Car ......................... 164 How to ......................................... 216
Capacity, Fluid ........................... 274 Brightness Control, Instruments ... 76 When to .............................. 204, 206
Shifting ........................................ 182 Brights, Headlights ......................... 74 Charging System Indicator .... 62, 260
Shift Lever Position Indicator .. 182 Bulb Replacement Checklist, Before Driving ............. 178
Shift Lever Positions ................. 182 Brake Lights............................... 233
Shift Lock Release ..................... 185 Front Parking Lights ................. 231 CONTINUED
I
０３／０９／０３１２：１５：１５３１ＳＤＡ６１００２９７
▼
Main Menu
Index
Childproof Door Locks ................... 85 Dashboard ........................................ 60 E

Child Seats ........................................ 34 Daytime Running Lights................. 76
Lower Anchorage Points ............ 46 Defects, Reporting Safety............. 290 Economy, Fuel ............................... 170
Tether Anchorage Points ........... 50 Defogger, Rear Window ................. 77 Emergencies on the Road............. 247
Climate Control Sensors ............... 121 Dimensions ..................................... 274 Battery, Jump Starting .............. 255
Clock, Setting the .......................... 153 Dimming the Headlights ................ 74 Brake System Indicator ............ 262
Clutch Fluid .................................... 226 Dipstick Changing a Flat Tire ................. 249
CO in the Exhaust ......................... 282 Automatic Transmission .. 221, 222 Charging System Indicator ...... 260
Cold Weather, Starting in ............. 179 Engine Oil ................................... 168 Checking the Fuses................... 265
Compact Spare ............................... 248 Directional Signals ........................... 74 Low Oil Pressure Indicator ...... 259
Console Compartment .................. 107 Disc Brake Wear Indicators ......... 188 Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 260
Consumer Information＊................ 288 Disposal of Used Oil ...................... 217 Manually Closing Moonroof .... 263
Controls, Instruments and .............. 59 Doors Overheated Engine ................... 257
Coolant Locking and Unlocking ............... 83 Emergency Brake .......................... 103
Adding ......................................... 219 DOT Tire Quality Grading ........... 277 Emergency Flashers ....................... 76
Checking ..................................... 169 Downshifting, 5-speed Manual Emergency Towing ....................... 264
Proper Solution .......................... 219 Transmission .............................. 180 Emissions Controls........................ 282
Temperature Gauge .................... 69 Driver and Passenger Safety ............ 5 Engine
Crankcase Emissions Control Driving ............................................ 177 Coolant Temperature Gauge ..... 69
System......................................... 282 Economy ..................................... 170 Malfunction Indicator
Cruise Control Operation ............. 155 In Foreign Countries ................. 281 Lamp ................................. 62, 260
Customer Service Office .............. 288 Dual Temperature Control ........... 119 Oil Pressure Indicator ......... 62, 259
Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 235 Oil, What Kind to Use ............... 214
D Overheating................................ 257
Specifications ............................. 274
DANGER, Explanation of ................. ii Speed Limiter ..................... 181, 184
II
０３／０９／０３１２：１５：２３３１ＳＤＡ６１００２９８
▼
Main Menu
Index
Starting........................................ 179 Manual Transmission ............... 224 Speedometer ................................ 68

Engine Speed Limiter ........... 181, 184 Power Steering........................... 226 Tachometer .................................. 68
Ethanol in Gasoline ....................... 280 Windshield Washer ................... 218 Gearshift Lever Positions
Evaporative Emissions Controls .. 282 Folding Rear Seat ............................ 95 Automatic Transmission........... 182
Exhaust Fumes ................................ 56 Foreign Countries, Driving in ...... 281 5-speed Manual
Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat Four-way Flashers ........................... 76 Transmission.......................... 180
Belts by ......................................... 17 Fuel .................................................. 164 Glove Box ....................................... 108
Fill Door and Cap....................... 165
F Gauge ............................................ 70 H
Octane Requirement ................. 164
Fan, Interior ........................... 110, 111 Oxygenated ................................ 280 Halogen Headlight Bulbs.............. 228
Features .......................................... 109 Tank, Filling the......................... 165 Hazard Warning Flashers............... 76
Filling the Fuel Tank ..................... 165 Fuses, Checking the ...................... 265 Headlights......................................... 74
Filter Aiming ......................................... 228
Dust and Pollen .......................... 235 G Automatic Lighting Off ............... 75
Oil ................................................ 216 Daytime Running Lights............. 76
5-speed Manual Transmission Gas Mileage, Improving................ 170 Low Beams, Turning on ............. 74
Checking Fluid Level ................ 224 Gasohol ........................................... 280 Reminder Chime .......................... 74
5-speed Manual Transmission Gasoline .......................................... 164 Replacing Halogen Bulbs ......... 228
Shifting the ................................. 180 Gauge ............................................ 70 Turning on .................................... 74
Flashers, Hazard Warning.............. 76 Octane Requirement ................. 164 Head Restraints ............................... 94
Flat Tire, Changing a .................... 249 Tank, Filling the......................... 165 Heating and Cooling ...................... 110
Fluids Gas Station Procedures................. 165 Heated Mirror .................................. 99
Automatic Transmission .. 221, 222 Gauges
Brake ........................................... 225 Engine Coolant Temperature .... 69
Clutch .......................................... 226 Fuel ................................................ 70 CONTINUED
III
０３／０９／０３１２：１５：３０３１ＳＤＡ６１００２９９
▼
Main Menu
Index
HomeLink Universal Introduction ......................................... i Glove Box ................................... 108

Transceiver................................. 158 Lockout Prevention ..................... 84
Hood, Opening the ........................ 166 J Power Door .................................. 83
Hydraulic Clutch ............................ 226 Trunk ............................................ 89
Jacking up the Vehicle .................. 250 Low Coolant Level ......................... 169
I Jack, Tire ........................................ 250 Lower Gear, Downshifting to a.... 180
Jump Starting ................................. 255 Low Oil Pressure Indicator .... 62, 259
Identification Number, Vehicle.... 272 Lubricant Specifications Chart .... 274
Ignition K Luggage .......................................... 173
Keys............................................... 79
Switch ............................................ 82 Keys ................................................... 79 M
Timing Control System ............. 283
Immobilizer System......................... 81 L Maintenance ................................... 199
Important Safety Precautions .......... 6 Owner Maintenance Checks.... 203
Indicators, Instrument Panel .......... 61 Label, Certification ........................ 272 Record ......................................... 208
Infant Restraint ................................ 40 Lane Change, Signaling .................. 74 Required Indicator ....................... 70
Infant Seats ....................................... 40 Lap/Shoulder Belts ................... 15, 19 Safety........................................... 200
Tether Anchorage Points ........... 50 Lights Schedule .............................. 204-207
Inflation, Proper Tire .................... 238 Bulb Replacement ..................... 228 Malfunction Indicator Lamp .. 62, 260
Inside Mirror .................................... 98 Indicator ........................................ 61 Manual Transmission.................... 180
Inspection, Tire .............................. 240 Parking .......................................... 74 Manual Transmission Fluid ......... 224
Installing a Child Seat ..................... 45 Turn Signal ................................... 65 Meters, Gauges ................................ 68
Tether Anchorage Points ........... 47 LOCK (Ignition Key Position) ....... 82 Methanol in Gasoline .................... 280
Using LATCH .............................. 46 Locks Mirrors, Adjusting ........................... 98
Instrument Panel ............................. 61 Anti-theft Steering Column ........ 82 Modifications.................................. 172
Instrument Panel Brightness ......... 76 Fuel Fill Door ............................. 165
IV
０３／０９／０３１２：１５：３７３１ＳＤＡ６１００３００
▼
Main Menu
Index
Moonroof ........................................ 102 ON (Ignition Key Position) ............ 82 Protecting Larger Children ............ 51
Closing Manually ....................... 263 Operation in Foreign Countries ... 281 Using Booster Seat ...................... 52
Operation .................................... 102 Outside Mirrors ............................... 98
Outside Temperature ...................... 68 R
N Overheating, Engine ..................... 257
Owner Maintenance Checks ........ 203 Radiator Overheating .................... 257
Neutral Gear Position.................... 183 Oxygenated Fuel ........................... 280 Radio/CD Sound
New Vehicle Break-in ................... 164 System ........................ 122, 130, 132
Normal Shift Speeds...................... 181 P Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement ... 233
NOTICE, Explanation of .................... i Rear Seat, Folding ........................... 95
Numbers, Identification ................ 272 Panel Brightness Control ............... 76 Rear View Mirror ............................. 98
Park Gear Position......................... 183 Rear Window Defogger .................. 77
O Parking Brake ................................ 103 Reclining the Seat Backs .......... 92, 93
Parking Lights.................................. 74 Recommended Shift Speeds ........ 181
Octane Requirement, Gasoline .... 164 Parking Over Things that Burn ... 284 Reminder Lights .............................. 61
Odometer .......................................... 68 Parking Tips ................................... 187 Remote Transmitter ........................ 85
Odometer/Outside Temperature PGM-FI System.............................. 283 Replacement Information
Indicator ....................................... 68 Pollen Filter .................................... 235 Engine Oil and Filter ................. 216
Odometer, Trip ................................ 69 Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts .......... 17 Fuses ........................................... 265
Oil Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 11 Light Bulbs ................................. 228
Change, How to ......................... 216 Additional Safety Precautions .... 18 Schedule ............................. 204, 206
Change, When to ............... 204, 206 Advice for Pregnant Women...... 17 Tires ............................................ 241
Checking Engine ....................... 168 Protecting Children ......................... 34 Wiper Blades .............................. 236
Pressure Indicator ............... 62, 259 Protecting Infants and Small
Selecting Proper Viscosity Children ........................................ 40
Chart ....................................... 215 CONTINUED
V
０３／０９／０３１２：１５：４２３１ＳＤＡ６１００３０１
▼
Main Menu
Index
Replacing Seat Belts After a Use During Pregnancy................ 17 Specifications Charts..................... 274
Crash ............................................. 21 Wearing Lap/Shoulder Belt ....... 14 Speed Control ................................. 155
Reserve Tank, Coolant .................. 219 Seats, Adjusting the................... 92, 93 Speed Limiter ......................... 181, 184
Restraint, Child ................................ 34 Security System ............................. 154 Speedometer .................................... 68
Reverse Gear Position................... 183 Selecting a Child Seat ...................... 43 SRS, Additional Information........... 22
Rotation, Tire ................................. 241 Select/Reset Knob .................... 68, 69 Additional Safety Precautions .... 33
Serial Number ................................ 272 How the Passenger Airbag Off
S Service Intervals .................... 204, 206 Indicator Light Works ............ 31
Service Manual＊ ............................ 292 How Your Airbags
Safety Belts ......................................... 8 Service Station Procedures .......... 165 Work ............................. 23, 27, 28
Safety Defects, Reporting＊ .......... 290 Setting the Clock ........................... 153 How Your SRS Indicator Light
Safety Features .................................. 7 Shift Lever Position Indicator ...... 182 Works ........................................ 28
Airbags ............................................ 9 Shift Lock Release ......................... 185 SRS Components ......................... 22
Seat Belts ........................................ 8 Side Airbags ................................. 9, 27 SRS Service................................... 32
Safety Labels, Location of .............. 57 How Your Side Airbags Work.... 27 SRS Indicator.............................. 28, 63
Safety Messages ................................ ii How The SIDE Airbag Off START (Ignition Key Position) ..... 82
Satellite Radio................................. 145 Indicator Light Works ............ 29 Starting the Engine........................ 179
Seat Belts ............................................ 8 Side Curtain Airbags ................. 10, 28 With a Dead Battery ................. 255
Additional Information ................ 19 How Your Side Curtain Steam Coming from Engine ......... 257
Automatic Seat Belt Airbags Work ........................... 28 Steering Wheel
Tensioners ................................ 20 Signaling Turns ................................ 74 Adjustment ................................... 78
Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 19 Snow Tires ...................................... 242 Anti-theft Column Lock .............. 82
Maintenance ................................. 21 Sound System ........ 122, 130, 132, 140 Stereo Sound
Reminder Light and Spare Tire System ................ 122, 130, 132, 140
Beeper ................................. 19, 62 Inflating ....................................... 248 Sun Visor......................................... 104
System Components.................... 19 Specifications ............................. 276 Sunglasses Holder ......................... 108
VI
０３／０９／０３１２：１５：５０３１ＳＤＡ６１００３０２
▼
Main Menu
Index
Supplemental Restraint System Tires ................................................ 238 Shifting the Automatic .............. 182
Servicing ....................................... 32 Air Pressure ............................... 239 Shifting the Manual ................... 180
SRS Indicator.......................... 28, 63 Checking Wear .......................... 240 Treadwear ...................................... 277
System Components.................... 22 Compact Spare ........................... 248 Trip Meter ........................................ 69
Synthetic Oil ................................... 215 DOT Tire Quality Grading ....... 277 Trunk................................................. 89
Inflation ....................................... 238 Emergency Opener ..................... 90
T Inspection ................................... 240 Opening the .................................. 89
Replacing .................................... 241 Open Monitor Light .................... 64
Tachometer ...................................... 68 Rotating....................................... 241 Turn Signals ..................................... 74
Taillights, Changing Bulbs in ....... 233 Snow ............................................ 242
Taking Care of the Unexpected .. 247 Specifications ............................. 276 U
Technical Descriptions Tools, Tire Changing .................... 249
DOT Tire Quality Grading ....... 277 Towing Unexpected, Taking Care
Emissions Control Systems ...... 282 A Trailer ...................................... 194 of the ........................................... 247
Oxygenated Fuels...................... 280 Emergency Wrecker ................. 264 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..... 277
Three Way Catalytic Traction Control System............... 191 Unleaded Gasoline......................... 164
Converter ................................ 284 TCS Activation Indicator .... 63, 192 Upholstery Cleaning...................... 235
Temperature Gauge ........................ 69 TCS Indicator ....................... 64, 191 Used Oil, How to Dispose of ........ 217
Tether Anchorage Points ............... 50 TCS ON/OFF Switch................ 192
Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 284 Transmission V
Time, Setting the ........................... 153 Checking Fluid Level,
Timing Belt ..................................... 227 Automatic ....................... 221, 222 Vanity Mirror ................................. 104
Tire Chains ..................................... 243 Checking Fluid Level, Vehicle Capacity Load .................. 174
Tire, How to Change a Flat .......... 249 Manual .................................... 224 Vehicle Dimensions....................... 274
Tire Labeling .................................. 279 Fluid Selection ........... 221, 223, 224
Identification Number............... 272 CONTINUED
VII
０３／０９／０３１２：１５：５５３１ＳＤＡ６１００３０３
▼
Main Menu
Index
Vehicle Identification Number..... 272 Operation ...................................... 73

Vehicle Storage .............................. 246 Worn Tires ..................................... 240
VIN .................................................. 272 Wrecker, Emergency Towing ...... 264
Viscosity, Oil................................... 215
＊
: U.S. and Canada only
W
WARNING, Explanation of .............. ii
Warning Labels, Location of .......... 57
Warranty Coverages＊ ................... 289
Washer, Windshield
Checking the Fluid Level ......... 218
Operation ...................................... 73
Wheels
Adjusting the Steering ................ 78
Alignment and Balance ............. 240
Compact Spare ........................... 248
Wrench ....................................... 251
Windows
Operating the Power ................... 99
Rear, Defogger ............................ 77
Windshield
Cleaning ........................................ 73
Washers ........................................ 73
Wipers, Windshield
Changing Blades ........................ 236
VIII
０３／０９／０３１２：１６：１３３１ＳＤＡ６１００３０５
▼
Main Menu
Service Information Summary
Gasoline: 5-speed Manual Transmission Tire Pressure (measured cold):

Unleaded gasoline, pump octane Fluid: LX
number of 86 or higher. Honda Manual Transmission Front:
Fluid preferred, or an SAE 10W-30 30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )
Fuel Tank Capacity: or 10W-40 motor oil as a Rear:
17.09 US gal (64.7 ) temporary replacement (see page 29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm )
224 ).
Recommended Engine Oil: Capacity: All other models
API Premium grade 5W-20 2.0 US qt (1.9 ) Front:
detergent oil (see page 215 ). 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
Power Steering Fluid: Rear:
Oil change capacity (including Honda Power Steering Fluid 30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )
filter): preferred, or another brand of
4-cylinder models power steering fluid as a
4.4 US qt (4.2 ) temporary replacement. Do not
6-cylinder models use ATF (see page 226 ).
4.5 US qt (4.3 )
Brake Fluid:
Automatic Transmission Fluid: Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
Transmission Fluid) preferred, or DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
a DEXRON III ATF as a replacement (see page 225 ).
temporary replacement (see
pages 221 and 224 ).

Honda-Accord 2004 EN US 44ee66b7a2 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Honda-Accord 2004 EN US 44ee66b7a2 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2004 Accord 4 Door Online Reference Owner's Manual

Owner's Identification Form

Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manual

California Proposition 65 Warning

WARNING: This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of

A Few Words About Safety

Of course, it is not practical or You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow

Your Vehicle at a Glance

TRUNK RELEASE HANDLE/ HOOD RELEASE ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS

Your Vehicle at a Glance

INSTRUMENT PANEL WINDSHIELD PASSENGER AIRBAG

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM STEERING WHEEL HORN

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver and Passenger Safety 5

Important Safety Precautions

6 Driver and Passenger Safety

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Your vehicle is equipped with many

Driver and Passenger Safety 7

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

8 Driver and Passenger Safety

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

What You Should Do: Airbags

Not wearing a seat belt properly

Be sure you and your

Driver and Passenger Safety 9

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Airbags can pose hazards. To do

What you should do: Always wear

10 Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting Adults and Teens

See page 83 for how to lock the

Driver and Passenger Safety 11

Protecting Adults and Teens

2.Adjust the Front Seats The National Highway Traffic Safety

Once your seat is adjusted correctly,

If you sit too close to the steering

12 Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting Adults and Teens

3.Adjust the Seat-Backs Reclining a seat-back so that the

See pages 92 and 93 for how to

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a

Passengers with adjustable seat-

Driver and Passenger Safety 13

Protecting Adults and Teens

4.Adjust the Head Restraints 5.Fasten and Position the Lap/

Properly adjusted head restraints

14 Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting Adults and Teens

over the strongest bones in your RELEASE

Never place the shoulder portion of a

Driver and Passenger Safety 15

Protecting Adults and Teens

Adjust the steering wheel, if needed,

See page 78 for how to adjust the

16 Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting Adults and Teens

Driver and Passenger Safety 17

Protecting Adults and Teens

18 Driver and Passenger Safety

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

If you do not fasten your seat belt